ChangeLog rotatation and copyright year update
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b90efa5b 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
b90efa5b 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b90efa5b 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976@kindex -Ur
977@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 978@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
979For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
980@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 981turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
982@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
983It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
984with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
985be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
986@samp{-r} for the others.
987
577a0623
AM
988@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
989@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
990Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
991@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
992missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
993specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
994multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
995input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
996in a linker script.
a854a4a7 997
252b5132
RH
998@kindex -v
999@kindex -V
1000@kindex --version
1001@cindex version
1002@item -v
1003@itemx --version
1004@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1005Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1006lists the supported emulations.
1007
1008@kindex -x
1009@kindex --discard-all
1010@cindex deleting local symbols
1011@item -x
1012@itemx --discard-all
1013Delete all local symbols.
1014
1015@kindex -X
1016@kindex --discard-locals
1017@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -X
252b5132 1019@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1020Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1021system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1022or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1023
1024@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1025@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1026@cindex symbol tracing
1027@item -y @var{symbol}
1028@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1029Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1030option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1031to prepend an underscore.
1032
1033This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1034don't know where the reference is coming from.
1035
1036@kindex -Y @var{path}
1037@item -Y @var{path}
1038Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1039for Solaris compatibility.
1040
1041@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1042@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1043The recognized keywords are:
1044@table @samp
1045
1046@item combreloc
1047Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1048lookup caching possible.
1049
1050@item defs
560e09e9 1051Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1052shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1053
6aa29e7b
JJ
1054@item execstack
1055Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1056
b039ef04
L
1057@item global
1058This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1059the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1060of subsequently loaded libraries.
1061
cd6d6c15
NC
1062@item initfirst
1063This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1064It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1065before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1066the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1067the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1068objects.
1069
1070@item interpose
1071Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1072but the primary executable.
1073
5fa222e4
AM
1074@item lazy
1075When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1076dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1077the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1078Lazy binding is the default.
1079
cd6d6c15
NC
1080@item loadfltr
1081Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1082runtime.
1083
1084@item muldefs
1085Allows multiple definitions.
1086
1087@item nocombreloc
1088Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1089
1090@item nocopyreloc
1091Disables production of copy relocs.
1092
1093@item nodefaultlib
1094Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1095ignore any default library search paths.
1096
1097@item nodelete
1098Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1099
1100@item nodlopen
1101Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1102
1103@item nodump
1104Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1105
6aa29e7b
JJ
1106@item noexecstack
1107Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1108
1109@item norelro
1110Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1111
cd6d6c15
NC
1112@item now
1113When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1114dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1115when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1116deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1117first called.
1118
1119@item origin
1120Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1121
6aa29e7b
JJ
1122@item relro
1123Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1124
24718e3b
L
1125@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1126Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1127
1128@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1129Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1130
04c3a755
NS
1131@item stack-size=@var{value}
1132Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1133Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1134@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1135
d258b828
IZ
1136@item bndplt
1137Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1138
cd6d6c15
NC
1139@end table
1140
ece2d90e 1141Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1142
1143@kindex -(
1144@cindex groups of archives
1145@item -( @var{archives} -)
1146@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1147The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1148either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1149
1150The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1151references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1152the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1153archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1154object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1155would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1156they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1157resolved.
1158
1159Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1160it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1161more archives.
1162
69da35b5
NC
1163@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1164@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1165@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1166@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1167Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1168recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1169and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1170the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1171behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1172so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1173restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1174
4a43e768
AM
1175@kindex --as-needed
1176@kindex --no-as-needed
1177@item --as-needed
1178@itemx --no-as-needed
1179This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1180on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1181the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1182on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1183needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1184emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1185non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1186the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1187non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1188Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1189the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1190needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1191from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1192
e56f61be
L
1193@kindex --add-needed
1194@kindex --no-add-needed
1195@item --add-needed
1196@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1197These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1198their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1199options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1200and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1201
252b5132
RH
1202@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1203@item -assert @var{keyword}
1204This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1205
1206@kindex -Bdynamic
1207@kindex -dy
1208@kindex -call_shared
1209@item -Bdynamic
1210@itemx -dy
1211@itemx -call_shared
1212Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1213for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1214default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1215for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1216multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1217@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1218
a1ab1d2a
UD
1219@kindex -Bgroup
1220@item -Bgroup
1221Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1222section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1223object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1224@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1225only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1226
252b5132
RH
1227@kindex -Bstatic
1228@kindex -dn
1229@kindex -non_shared
1230@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1231@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1232@itemx -dn
1233@itemx -non_shared
1234@itemx -static
1235Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1236platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1237variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1238may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1239library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1240option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1241option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1242shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1243references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1244libraries.
252b5132
RH
1245
1246@kindex -Bsymbolic
1247@item -Bsymbolic
1248When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1249definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1250for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1251within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1252platforms which support shared libraries.
1253
40b36307
L
1254@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1255@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1256When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1257symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1258This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1259libraries.
1260
55255dae
L
1261@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1262@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1263Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1264typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1265global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1266within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1267to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1268in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1269which support shared libraries.
1270
1271The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1272scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1273
40b36307
L
1274@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1275@item --dynamic-list-data
1276Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1277
1278@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1279@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1280Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1281is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1282
0b8a70d9
L
1283@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1284@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1285Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1286
252b5132
RH
1287@kindex --check-sections
1288@kindex --no-check-sections
1289@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1290@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1291Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1292been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1293perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1294suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1295allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1296restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1297Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1298force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1299option.
252b5132 1300
ddbb8a31
NC
1301@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1302@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1303@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1304@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1305This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1306by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1307command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1308output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1309input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1310specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1311follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1312behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1313
1314This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1315libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1316mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1317their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1318required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1319the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1320dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1321symbols.
1322
252b5132
RH
1323@cindex cross reference table
1324@kindex --cref
1325@item --cref
1326Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1327generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1328Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1329
1330The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1331easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1332sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1333symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1334definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1335where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1336symbol are listed.
252b5132 1337
4818e05f
AM
1338@cindex common allocation
1339@kindex --no-define-common
1340@item --no-define-common
1341This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1342The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1343@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1344
1345The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1346the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1347of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1348forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1349Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1350from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1351This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1352and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1353duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1354paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1355
252b5132 1356@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1357@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1358@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1359Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1360address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1361times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1362limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1363context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1364symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1365constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1366using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1367Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1368space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1369@var{expression}.
1370
1371@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1372@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1373@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1374@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1375@itemx --no-demangle
1376These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1377and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1378present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1379underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1380mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1381different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1382to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1383demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1384is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1385
1386@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1387@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1388@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1389@item -I@var{file}
1390@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1391Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1392generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1393linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1394doing.
1395
7ce691ae 1396@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1397@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1398@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1399@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1400Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1401with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1402
252b5132
RH
1403@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1404@item --force-exe-suffix
1405Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1406
1407If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1408@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1409the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1410option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1411Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1412it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1413
1414@kindex --gc-sections
1415@kindex --no-gc-sections
1416@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1417@item --gc-sections
1418@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1419Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1420targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1421performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1422@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1423
d5465ba2
AM
1424@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1425examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1426symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1427command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1428referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1429libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1430referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1431the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1432relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1433
ac69cbc6 1434This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1435@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1436specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1437a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1438
c17d87de
NC
1439@kindex --print-gc-sections
1440@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1441@cindex garbage collection
1442@item --print-gc-sections
1443@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1444List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1445printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1446collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1447default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1448be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1449line.
1450
30824704
RM
1451@kindex --print-output-format
1452@cindex output format
1453@item --print-output-format
1454Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1455other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1456in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1457
252b5132
RH
1458@cindex help
1459@cindex usage
1460@kindex --help
1461@item --help
1462Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1463
ea20a7da
CC
1464@kindex --target-help
1465@item --target-help
1466Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1467
2509a395
SL
1468@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1469@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1470Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1471@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1472
1473@cindex memory usage
1474@kindex --no-keep-memory
1475@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1476@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1477symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1478instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1479necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1480while linking a large executable.
1481
1482@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1483@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1484@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1485@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1486Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1487is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1488The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1489behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1490libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1491
aa713662
L
1492@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1493@kindex -z muldefs
1494@item --allow-multiple-definition
1495@itemx -z muldefs
1496Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1497report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1498first definition will be used.
1499
b79e8c78 1500@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1501@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1502@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1503@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1504Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1505This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1506determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1507shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1508how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1509
903249d7
NC
1510The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1511referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1512an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1513a shared library.
1514
1515The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1516libraries specified at link time are that:
1517
1518@itemize @bullet
1519@item
1520A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1521that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1522resolvable at load time.
1523@item
1524There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1525symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1526
1527The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1528select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1529architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1530appropriate memset function.
1531@end itemize
b79e8c78 1532
31941635
L
1533@kindex --no-undefined-version
1534@item --no-undefined-version
1535Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1536it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1537will be issued instead.
1538
3e3b46e5
PB
1539@kindex --default-symver
1540@item --default-symver
1541Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1542exported symbols.
1543
1544@kindex --default-imported-symver
1545@item --default-imported-symver
1546Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1547imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1548
252b5132
RH
1549@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1550@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1551Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1552files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1553been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1554This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1555errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1556have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1557inappropriate.
1558
fe7929ce
AM
1559@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1560@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1561Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1562library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1563
252b5132
RH
1564@kindex --no-whole-archive
1565@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1566Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1567archive files.
1568
1569@cindex output file after errors
1570@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1571@item --noinhibit-exec
1572Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1573Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1574errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1575when it issues any error whatsoever.
1576
0a9c1c8e
CD
1577@kindex -nostdlib
1578@item -nostdlib
1579Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1580command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1581(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1582
252b5132 1583@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1584@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1585@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1586@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1587file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1588@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1589object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1590object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1591should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1592usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1593name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1594list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1595command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1596this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1597@end ifclear
1598
36af4a4e
JJ
1599@kindex -pie
1600@kindex --pic-executable
1601@item -pie
1602@itemx --pic-executable
1603@cindex position independent executables
1604Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1605ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1606libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1607address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1608normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1609defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@kindex -qmagic
1612@item -qmagic
1613This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1614
1615@kindex -Qy
1616@item -Qy
1617This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1618
1619@kindex --relax
1620@cindex synthesizing linker
1621@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1622@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1623@item --relax
28d5f677 1624@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1625An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1626@ifset GENERIC
1627This option is only supported on a few targets.
1628@end ifset
1629@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1630@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1631@end ifset
1632@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1633@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1634@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1635@ifset XTENSA
1636@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1637@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1638@ifset M68HC11
1639@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1640@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1641@ifset NIOSII
1642@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1643@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1644@ifset POWERPC
1645@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1646@end ifset
252b5132 1647
28d5f677
NC
1648On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1649global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1650addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1651synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1652instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1653
1654On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1655debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1656@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1657This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1658family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1659@end ifset
1660
1661@ifset GENERIC
1662On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1663but ignored.
1664@end ifset
1665
28d5f677
NC
1666On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1667@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1668
252b5132
RH
1669@cindex retaining specified symbols
1670@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1671@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1672@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1673@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1674Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1675discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1676symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1677@ifset GENERIC
1678(such as VxWorks)
1679@end ifset
1680where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1681run-time memory.
1682
1683@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1684or symbols needed for relocations.
1685
1686You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1687line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1688
1689@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1690@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1691@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1692@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1693Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1694linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1695arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1696them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1697also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1698objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1699@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1700ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1701@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1702
ff5dcc92 1703The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1704SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1705@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1706runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1707options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1708gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1709file systems.
252b5132 1710
ff5dcc92 1711For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1712followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1713the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1714@end ifset
1715
1716@ifset GENERIC
1717@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1718@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1719@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1720When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1721happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1722of the input files.
1723
1724When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1725non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1726shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1727explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1728specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1729@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1730either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1731appearing multiple times.
1732
28c309a2
NC
1733This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1734that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1735is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1736runtime linker would do.
1737
252b5132 1738The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1739libraries:
252b5132
RH
1740@enumerate
1741@item
ff5dcc92 1742Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1743@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1744Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1745between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1746specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1747used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1748at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1749by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1750the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1751@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1752On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1753@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1754environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1755@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1756On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1757directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1758@item
a1b8d843 1759For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1760variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1761@item
ec4eb78a
L
1762For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1763@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1764libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1765@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1766@item
252b5132
RH
1767The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1768@item
1769For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1770exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1771@end enumerate
1772
1773If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1774warning and continue with the link.
1775@end ifset
1776
1777@kindex -shared
1778@kindex -Bshareable
1779@item -shared
1780@itemx -Bshareable
1781@cindex shared libraries
1782Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1783and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1784shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1785undefined symbols in the link.
1786
252b5132 1787@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1788@item --sort-common
1789@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1790@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1791This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1792ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1793sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1794eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1795between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1796specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1797
2509a395
SL
1798@kindex --sort-section=name
1799@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1800This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1801patterns in the linker script.
1802
2509a395
SL
1803@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1804@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1805This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1806patterns in the linker script.
1807
252b5132 1808@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1809@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1810Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1811each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1812size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1813
1814@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1815@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1816Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1817output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1818This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1819certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1820cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1821that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1822support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1823input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1824more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1825many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1826
1827@kindex --stats
1828@item --stats
1829Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1830as execution time and memory usage.
1831
2509a395 1832@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1833@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1834Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1835configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1836that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1837
252b5132
RH
1838@kindex --traditional-format
1839@cindex traditional format
1840@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1841For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1842the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1843use the traditional format instead.
1844
1845@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1846For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1847symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1848full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1849@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1850trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1851combine duplicate entries.
1852
2509a395
SL
1853@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1854@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1855Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1856address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1857times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1858line.
1859@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1860for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1861@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1862should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1863sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1864
2509a395
SL
1865@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1866@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1867@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1868@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1869@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1870@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1871@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1872Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1873@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1874
2509a395
SL
1875@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1876@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1877@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1878When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1879byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1880
9d5777a3
RM
1881@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1882@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1883@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1884When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1885the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1886text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1887
0d705e9f
AM
1888@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1889@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1890@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1891When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1892model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1893
560e09e9
NC
1894@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1895@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1896Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1897values for @samp{method}:
1898
1899@table @samp
1900@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1901Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1902
1903@item report-all
da8bce14 1904Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1905
1906@item ignore-in-object-files
1907Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1908ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1909
1910@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1911Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1912ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1913when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1914libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1915command line.
1916@end table
1917
1918The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1919by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1920
1921Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1922unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1923can change this to a warning.
1924
1715a13c
L
1925@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1926@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1927@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1928@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1929Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1930supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1931the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1932argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1933
1934@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1935@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1936@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1937Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1938used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1939about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1940is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1941see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1942use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1943symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1944@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1945
7ce691ae 1946@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1947@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1948@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1949@item --warn-common
1950Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1951a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1952but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1953you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1954Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1955warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1956
1957There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1958
1959@table @samp
1960@item int i = 1;
1961A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1962file.
1963
1964@item extern int i;
1965An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1966There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1967variable somewhere.
1968
1969@item int i;
1970A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1971variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1972The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1973single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1974size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1975a definition of the same variable.
1976@end table
1977
1978The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1979Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1980just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1981encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1982a common symbol.
1983
1984@enumerate
1985@item
1986Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1987definition for the symbol.
1988@smallexample
1989@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1990 overridden by definition
1991@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1992@end smallexample
1993
1994@item
1995Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1996the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1997except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1998@smallexample
1999@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2000 overriding common
2001@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2002@end smallexample
2003
2004@item
2005Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2006@smallexample
2007@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2008 of `@var{symbol}'
2009@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2010@end smallexample
2011
2012@item
2013Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2014@smallexample
2015@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2016 overridden by larger common
2017@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2018@end smallexample
2019
2020@item
2021Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2022the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2023encountered in a different order.
2024@smallexample
2025@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2026 overriding smaller common
2027@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2028@end smallexample
2029@end enumerate
2030
2031@kindex --warn-constructors
2032@item --warn-constructors
2033Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2034object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2035detect the use of global constructors.
2036
2037@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2038@item --warn-multiple-gp
2039Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2040This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2041Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2042section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2043of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2044base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2045base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2046bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2047large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2048values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2049option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2050
2051@kindex --warn-once
2052@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2053@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2054@item --warn-once
2055Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2056which refers to it.
2057
2058@kindex --warn-section-align
2059@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2060@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2061@item --warn-section-align
2062Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2063alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2064The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2065is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2066the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2067
8fdd7217
NC
2068@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2069@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2070Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2071
a0c402a5
L
2072@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2073@item --warn-alternate-em
2074Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2075
560e09e9
NC
2076@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2077@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2078If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2079@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2080This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2081
2082@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2083@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2084This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2085it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2086
252b5132
RH
2087@kindex --whole-archive
2088@cindex including an entire archive
2089@item --whole-archive
2090For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2091@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2092in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2093files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2094library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2095library. This option may be used more than once.
2096
7ec229ce 2097Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2098about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2099Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2100list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2101your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2102
2509a395
SL
2103@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2104@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2105Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2106@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2107undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2108@var{symbol}.
2109
2110This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2111wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2112wishes to call the system function, it should call
2113@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2114
2115Here is a trivial example:
2116
2117@smallexample
2118void *
cc2f008e 2119__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2120@{
cc2f008e 2121 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2122 return __real_malloc (c);
2123@}
2124@end smallexample
2125
ff5dcc92 2126If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2127all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2128instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2129call the real @code{malloc} function.
2130
2131You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2132links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2133you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2134file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2135call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2136
6aa29e7b
JJ
2137@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2138@item --eh-frame-hdr
2139Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2140@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2141
e41b3a13
JJ
2142@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2143@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2144Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2145generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2146if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2147
6c1439be
L
2148@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2149@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2150@item --enable-new-dtags
2151@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2152This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2153systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2154@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2155and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2156If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2157created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2158those options are only available for ELF systems.
2159
2d643429 2160@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2161@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2162Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2163close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2164time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2165increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2166value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2167
fdc90cb4
JJ
2168@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2169@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2170Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2171@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2172new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2173the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2174hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2175
35835446
JR
2176@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2177@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2178This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2179linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2180for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2181about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2182
4f9c04f7 2183Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21841021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2185run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2186has been used.
2187
2188The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2189enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2190
c0065db7
RM
2191@kindex --build-id
2192@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2193@item --build-id
2194@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c
JT
2195Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2196or a @code{.build-id} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2197unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2198@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2199@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2200@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2201the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2202string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2203@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2204is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2205
2206The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2207that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2208unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2209to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2210file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2211string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2212
2213Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2214@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2215@end table
2216
0285c67d
NC
2217@c man end
2218
36f63dca 2219@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2220
0285c67d
NC
2221@c man begin OPTIONS
2222
ff5dcc92 2223The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2224the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2225normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2226use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2227@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2228like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2229symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2230object file).
2231
2232In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2233support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2234PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2235values by either a space or an equals sign.
2236
ff5dcc92 2237@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2238
2239@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2240@item --add-stdcall-alias
2241If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2242as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2243[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2244
2245@kindex --base-file
2246@item --base-file @var{file}
2247Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2248addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2249@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2250[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2251
2252@kindex --dll
2253@item --dll
2254Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2255@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2256file.
bb10df36 2257[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2258
88183869
DK
2259@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2260@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2261@item --enable-long-section-names
2262@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2263The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2264the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2265for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2266fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2267to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2268allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2269disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2270generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2271as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2272with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2273GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2274information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2275option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2276section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2277when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2278image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2279[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2280
252b5132
RH
2281@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2282@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2283@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2284@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2285If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2286do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2287only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2288resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2289undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2290@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2291to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2292warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2293import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2294to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2295feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2296@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2297mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2298[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2299
522f09cd
KT
2300@kindex --leading-underscore
2301@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2302@item --leading-underscore
2303@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2304For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2305in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2306disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2307
252b5132
RH
2308@cindex DLLs, creating
2309@kindex --export-all-symbols
2310@item --export-all-symbols
2311If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2312be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2313otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2314explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2315attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2316option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2317@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2318@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2319exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2320re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2321such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2322@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2323@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2324Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2325not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2326extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2327(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2328These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2329@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2330@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2331@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2332@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2334
2335@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2336@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2337Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2338exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2340
2927aaca
NC
2341@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2342@item --exclude-all-symbols
2343Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2344[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2345
252b5132
RH
2346@kindex --file-alignment
2347@item --file-alignment
2348Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2349file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2350512.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2352
2353@cindex heap size
2354@kindex --heap
2355@item --heap @var{reserve}
2356@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2357Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2358to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2359committed.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2361
2362@cindex image base
2363@kindex --image-base
2364@item --image-base @var{value}
2365Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2366the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2367is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2368your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2369other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2370for dlls.
bb10df36 2371[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2372
2373@kindex --kill-at
2374@item --kill-at
2375If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2376symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2378
26d2d8a2
BF
2379@kindex --large-address-aware
2380@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2381If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2382header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2383greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2384or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2385section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2386[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2387
f69a2f97
NC
2388@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2389@item --disable-large-address-aware
2390Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2391This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2392driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2393addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2394[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2395
252b5132
RH
2396@kindex --major-image-version
2397@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2398Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2399[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2400
2401@kindex --major-os-version
2402@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2403Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2404[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2405
2406@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2407@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2408Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2409[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2410
2411@kindex --minor-image-version
2412@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2413Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2414[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2415
2416@kindex --minor-os-version
2417@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2418Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2419[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2420
2421@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2422@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2423Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2424[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2425
2426@cindex DEF files, creating
2427@cindex DLLs, creating
2428@kindex --output-def
2429@item --output-def @var{file}
2430The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2431file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2432(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2433library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2434automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2435[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2436
b044cda1
CW
2437@cindex DLLs, creating
2438@kindex --out-implib
2439@item --out-implib @var{file}
2440The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2441import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2442import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2443may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2444makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2445creation step.
bb10df36 2446[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2447
2448@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2449@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2450@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2451Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2452@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2453By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2454for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2455execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2456[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2457
2458@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2459@item --disable-auto-image-base
2460Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2461user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2462default.
bb10df36 2463[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2464
2465@cindex DLLs, linking to
2466@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2467@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2468When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2469search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2470@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2471between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2472uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2473@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2474[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2475
2476@kindex --enable-auto-import
2477@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2478Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2479DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2480building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2481'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2482to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2483specification published by Microsoft.
2484
e2a83dd0
NC
2485Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2486data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2487placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2488around a problem with consts that is described here:
2489http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2490
4d8907ac
DS
2491Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2492see this message:
0d888aac 2493
ece2d90e 2494"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2495documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2496
ece2d90e
NC
2497This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2498ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2499allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2500fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2501constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2502multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2503this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2504of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2505the warning, and exit.
2506
2507There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2508data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2509
2fa9fc65
NC
2510One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2511of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2512this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2513
c0065db7
RM
2514A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2515that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2516there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2517a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2518
2519@example
2520extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2521extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2522 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2523@end example
2524
2525or
2526
2527@example
2528extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2529extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2530 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2531@end example
2532
c0065db7 2533For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2534is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2535
2536@example
2537extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2538extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2539 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2540@end example
2541
c406afaf
NC
2542or
2543
2544@example
2545extern long long extern_ll;
2546extern_ll -->
2547 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2548@end example
2549
2fa9fc65 2550A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2551'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2552@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2553requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2554building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2555merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2556between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2557constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2558
2559Original:
2560@example
2561--foo.h
2562extern int arr[];
2563--foo.c
2564#include "foo.h"
2565void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2566 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2567@}
2568@end example
2569
2570Solution 1:
2571@example
2572--foo.h
2573extern int arr[];
2574--foo.c
2575#include "foo.h"
2576void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2577 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2578 volatile int *parr = arr;
2579 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2580@}
2581@end example
2582
2583Solution 2:
2584@example
2585--foo.h
2586/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2587#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2588 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2589#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2590#else
2591#define FOO_IMPORT
2592#endif
2593extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2594--foo.c
2595#include "foo.h"
2596void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2597 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2598@}
2599@end example
2600
c0065db7 2601A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2602library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2603for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2604functions).
bb10df36 2605[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2606
2607@kindex --disable-auto-import
2608@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2609Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2610@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2611[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2612
2fa9fc65
NC
2613@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2614@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2615If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2616that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2617a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2618environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2619[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2620
2621@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2622@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2623Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2624DLLs.
bb10df36 2625[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2626
b044cda1
CW
2627@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2628@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2629Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2630[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2631
252b5132
RH
2632@kindex --section-alignment
2633@item --section-alignment
2634Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2635addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2636[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2637
2638@cindex stack size
2639@kindex --stack
2640@item --stack @var{reserve}
2641@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2642Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2643to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2644committed.
bb10df36 2645[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2646
2647@kindex --subsystem
2648@item --subsystem @var{which}
2649@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2650@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2651Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2652legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2653@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2654the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2655@var{which}.
bb10df36 2656[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2657
2f563b51
DK
2658The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2659of the PE file header:
2660[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2661
2d5c3743
NC
2662@kindex --high-entropy-va
2663@item --high-entropy-va
2664Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2665(ASLR).
2666
2f563b51
DK
2667@kindex --dynamicbase
2668@item --dynamicbase
2669The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2670randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2671Vista for i386 PE targets.
2672
2673@kindex --forceinteg
2674@item --forceinteg
2675Code integrity checks are enforced.
2676
2677@kindex --nxcompat
2678@item --nxcompat
2679The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2680This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2681
2682@kindex --no-isolation
2683@item --no-isolation
2684Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2685
2686@kindex --no-seh
2687@item --no-seh
2688The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2689this image.
2690
2691@kindex --no-bind
2692@item --no-bind
2693Do not bind this image.
2694
2695@kindex --wdmdriver
2696@item --wdmdriver
2697The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2698
2f563b51
DK
2699@kindex --tsaware
2700@item --tsaware
2701The image is Terminal Server aware.
2702
0cb112f7
CF
2703@kindex --insert-timestamp
2704@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2705@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2706Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2707as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2708other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2709will result in slightly different images being produced each tiem the
2710same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2711can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2712that binaries produced from indentical sources will compare
2713identically.
252b5132
RH
2714@end table
2715
0285c67d
NC
2716@c man end
2717
ac145307
BS
2718@ifset C6X
2719@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2720
2721@c man begin OPTIONS
2722
2723The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2724libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2725all executables use an index of 0.
2726
2727@table @gcctabopt
2728
2729@kindex --dsbt-size
2730@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2731This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2732or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2733entries.
2734
2735@kindex --dsbt-index
2736@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2737This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2738to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2739executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2740@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2741
fbd9ad90
PB
2742@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2743The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2744exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2745
ac145307
BS
2746@end table
2747
2748@c man end
2749@end ifset
2750
93fd0973
SC
2751@ifset M68HC11
2752@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2753
2754@c man begin OPTIONS
2755
2756The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2757memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2758
2759@table @gcctabopt
2760
2761@kindex --no-trampoline
2762@item --no-trampoline
2763This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2764is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2765instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2766
2767@kindex --bank-window
2768@item --bank-window @var{name}
2769This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2770the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2771The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2772paging and addresses within the memory window.
2773
2774@end table
2775
2776@c man end
2777@end ifset
2778
7fb9f789
NC
2779@ifset M68K
2780@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2781
2782@c man begin OPTIONS
2783
2784The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2785when linking for 68K targets.
2786
2787@table @gcctabopt
2788
2789@kindex --got
2790@item --got=@var{type}
2791This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2792@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2793@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2794Info entry for @file{ld}.
2795
2796@end table
2797
2798@c man end
2799@end ifset
2800
833794fc
MR
2801@ifset MIPS
2802@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2803
2804@c man begin OPTIONS
2805
2806The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2807generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2808
2809@table @gcctabopt
2810
2811@kindex --insn32
2812@item --insn32
2813@kindex --no-insn32
2814@itemx --no-insn32
2815These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2816generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2817or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
281832-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2819used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2820possible.
2821
2822@end table
2823
2824@c man end
2825@end ifset
2826
252b5132
RH
2827@ifset UsesEnvVars
2828@node Environment
2829@section Environment Variables
2830
0285c67d
NC
2831@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2832
560e09e9 2833You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2834@ifclear SingleFormat
2835@code{GNUTARGET},
2836@end ifclear
2837@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2838
36f63dca 2839@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2840@kindex GNUTARGET
2841@cindex default input format
2842@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2843use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2844of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2845@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2846of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2847attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2848this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2849there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2850object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2851BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2852in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2853@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2854
2855@kindex LDEMULATION
2856@cindex default emulation
2857@cindex emulation, default
2858@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2859@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2860behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2861available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2862the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2863variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2864linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2865
2866@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2867@cindex demangling, default
2868Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2869@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2870default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2871a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2872may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2873options.
2874
0285c67d
NC
2875@c man end
2876@end ifset
2877
252b5132
RH
2878@node Scripts
2879@chapter Linker Scripts
2880
2881@cindex scripts
2882@cindex linker scripts
2883@cindex command files
2884Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2885written in the linker command language.
2886
2887The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2888the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2889the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2890more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2891direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2892described below.
2893
2894The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2895yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2896linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2897to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2898such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2899
2900You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2901line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2902default linker script.
2903
2904You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2905to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2906Linker Scripts}.
2907
2908@menu
2909* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2910* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2911* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2912* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2913* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2914* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2915* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2916* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2917* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2918* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2919* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2920@end menu
2921
2922@node Basic Script Concepts
2923@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2924@cindex linker script concepts
2925We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2926describe the linker script language.
2927
2928The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2929file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2930@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2931The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2932purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2933among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2934section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2935in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2936
2937Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2938also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2939contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2940the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2941A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2942area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2943loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2944which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2945of debugging information.
2946
2947Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2948first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2949the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2950@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2951section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2952same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2953is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2954(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2955based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2956RAM address would be the VMA.
2957
2958You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2959program with the @samp{-h} option.
2960
2961Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2962@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2963has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2964information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2965will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2966static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2967referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2968
2969You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2970program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2971option.
2972
2973@node Script Format
2974@section Linker Script Format
2975@cindex linker script format
2976Linker scripts are text files.
2977
2978You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2979either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2980symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2981generally ignored.
2982
2983Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2984If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2985otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2986double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2987file name.
2988
2989You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2990@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2991to whitespace.
2992
2993@node Simple Example
2994@section Simple Linker Script Example
2995@cindex linker script example
2996@cindex example of linker script
2997Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2998
2999The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3000@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3001memory layout of the output file.
3002
3003The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3004describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3005code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3006@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3007Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3008your input files.
3009
3010For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
30110x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3012linker script which will do that:
3013@smallexample
3014SECTIONS
3015@{
3016 . = 0x10000;
3017 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3018 . = 0x8000000;
3019 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3020 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3021@}
3022@end smallexample
3023
3024You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3025followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3026descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3027
252b5132
RH
3028The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3029sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3030counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3031other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3032current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3033incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3034@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3035
3036The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3037required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3038after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3039which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3040wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3041means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3042
3043Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3044@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3045@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3046
3047The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3048the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3049at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3050output section, the value of the location counter will be
3051@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3052effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3053immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3054
3055The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3056alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3057example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3058sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3059may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3060sections.
3061
3062That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3063
3064@node Simple Commands
3065@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3066@cindex linker script simple commands
3067In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3068
3069@menu
3070* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3071* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3072@ifclear SingleFormat
3073* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3074@end ifclear
3075
4a93e180 3076* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3077* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3078@end menu
3079
3080@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3081@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3082@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3083@cindex start of execution
3084@cindex first instruction
3085@cindex entry point
3086The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3087point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3088entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3089@smallexample
3090ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3091@end smallexample
3092
3093There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3094entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3095stopping when one of them succeeds:
3096@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3097@item
252b5132 3098the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3099@item
252b5132 3100the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3101@item
3ab904c4
NC
3102the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3103targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3104check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3105@item
252b5132 3106the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3107@item
252b5132
RH
3108The address @code{0}.
3109@end itemize
3110
3111@node File Commands
36f63dca 3112@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3113@cindex linker script file commands
3114Several linker script commands deal with files.
3115
3116@table @code
3117@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3118@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3119@cindex including a linker script
3120Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3121be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3122with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
312310 levels deep.
3124
4006703d
NS
3125You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3126@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3127
252b5132
RH
3128@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3129@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3130@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3131@cindex input files in linker scripts
3132@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3133@cindex linker script input object files
3134The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3135in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3136
3137For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3138a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3139then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3140
3141In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3142script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3143
e3f2db7f
AO
3144In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3145with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3146located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3147for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3148open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3149linker will search through the archive library search path.
3150The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3151as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3152description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3153
ff5dcc92 3154If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3155name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3156@samp{-l}.
3157
3158When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3159files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3160script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3161
3162@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3163@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3164@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3165@cindex grouping input files
3166The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3167files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3168new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3169in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3170
b717d30e
JJ
3171@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3172@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3173@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3174This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3175commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3176as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3177with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3178when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3179@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3180and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3181setting afterwards.
3182
252b5132
RH
3183@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3184@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3185@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3186The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3187@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3188@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3189Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3190precedence.
3191
3192You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3193output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3194
3195@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3196@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3197@cindex library search path in linker script
3198@cindex archive search path in linker script
3199@cindex search path in linker script
3200The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3201@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3202@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3203on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3204are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3205the command line option are searched first.
3206
3207@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3208@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3209@cindex first input file
3210The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3211that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3212though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3213when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3214first file.
3215@end table
3216
3217@ifclear SingleFormat
3218@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3219@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3220A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3221
3222@table @code
3223@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3224@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3225@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3226@cindex output file format in linker script
3227The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3228output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3229exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3230(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3231line option takes precedence.
3232
3233You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3234formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3235This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3236desired endianness.
3237
3238If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3239will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3240output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3241used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3242
3243For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3244command:
3245@smallexample
3246OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3247@end smallexample
3248This says that the default format for the output file is
3249@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3250option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3251format.
3252
3253@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3254@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3255@cindex input file format in linker script
3256The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3257files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3258This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3259(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3260is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3261command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3262@end table
3263@end ifclear
3264
4a93e180
NC
3265@node REGION_ALIAS
3266@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3267@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3268@cindex region alias
3269@cindex region names
3270
3271Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3272@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3273
3274@smallexample
3275REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3276@end smallexample
3277
3278The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3279memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3280to memory regions. An example follows.
3281
3282Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3283memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3284that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3285non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3286access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3287read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3288sections:
3289
3290@itemize @bullet
3291@item
3292@code{.text} program code;
3293@item
3294@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3295@item
3296@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3297@item
3298@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3299@end itemize
3300
3301The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3302part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3303output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3304systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3305@code{C}:
3306@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3307@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3308@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3309@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3310@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3311@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3312@end multitable
3313The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3314loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3315the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3316the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3317
3318The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3319includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3320memory layout:
3321@smallexample
3322INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3323
3324SECTIONS
3325 @{
3326 .text :
3327 @{
3328 *(.text)
3329 @} > REGION_TEXT
3330 .rodata :
3331 @{
3332 *(.rodata)
3333 rodata_end = .;
3334 @} > REGION_RODATA
3335 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3336 @{
3337 data_start = .;
3338 *(.data)
3339 @} > REGION_DATA
3340 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3341 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3342 .bss :
3343 @{
3344 *(.bss)
3345 @} > REGION_BSS
3346 @}
3347@end smallexample
3348
3349Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3350regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3351variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3352@table @code
3353@item A
3354Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3355@smallexample
3356MEMORY
3357 @{
3358 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3359 @}
3360
3361REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3362REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3363REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3364REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3365@end smallexample
3366@item B
3367Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3368into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3369@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3370@smallexample
3371MEMORY
3372 @{
3373 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3374 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3375 @}
3376
3377REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3378REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3379REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3380REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3381@end smallexample
3382@item C
3383Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3384@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3385initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3386system start into the @code{RAM}.
3387@smallexample
3388MEMORY
3389 @{
3390 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3391 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3392 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3393 @}
3394
3395REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3396REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3397REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3398REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3399@end smallexample
3400@end table
3401
3402It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3403@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3404necessary:
3405@smallexample
3406#include <string.h>
3407
3408extern char data_start [];
3409extern char data_size [];
3410extern char data_load_start [];
3411
3412void copy_data(void)
3413@{
3414 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3415 @{
3416 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3417 @}
3418@}
3419@end smallexample
3420
252b5132 3421@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3422@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3423There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3424
3425@table @code
3426@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3427@kindex ASSERT
3428@cindex assertion in linker script
3429Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3430with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3431
3432@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3433@kindex EXTERN
3434@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3435Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3436symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3437modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3438each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3439command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3440
3441@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3442@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3443@cindex common allocation in linker script
3444This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3445to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3446output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3447
4818e05f
AM
3448@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3449@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3450@cindex common allocation in linker script
3451This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3452command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3453to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3454
53d25da6
AM
3455@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3456@kindex INSERT
3457@cindex insert user script into default script
3458This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3459augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3460inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3461@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3462default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3463sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3464linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3465insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3466linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3467default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3468of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3469to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3470is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3471
3472@smallexample
3473SECTIONS
3474@{
3475 OVERLAY :
3476 @{
3477 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3478 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3479 @}
3480@}
3481INSERT AFTER .text;
3482@end smallexample
3483
252b5132
RH
3484@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3485@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3486@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3487This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3488references among certain output sections.
3489
3490In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3491using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3492will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3493errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3494a function defined in the other section.
3495
3496The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3497@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3498an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3499@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3500names.
3501
3502@ifclear SingleFormat
3503@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3504@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3505@cindex machine architecture
3506@cindex architecture
3507Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3508of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3509architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3510the @samp{-f} option.
3511@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3512
3513@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3514@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3515This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3516@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3517in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3518@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3519@end table
3520
3521@node Assignments
3522@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3523@cindex assignment in scripts
3524@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3525@cindex variables, defining
3526You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3527the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3528
3529@menu
3530* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3531* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3532* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3533* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3534* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3535@end menu
3536
3537@node Simple Assignments
3538@subsection Simple Assignments
3539
3540You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3541
3542@table @code
3543@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3544@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3545@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3546@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3547@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3548@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3549@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3550@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3551@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3552@end table
3553
3554The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3555@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3556defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3557
3558The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3559may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3560
3561The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3562
3563Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3564
3565You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3566statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3567section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3568
3569The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3570expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3571
3572Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3573assignments may be used:
3574
3575@smallexample
3576floating_point = 0;
3577SECTIONS
3578@{
3579 .text :
3580 @{
3581 *(.text)
3582 _etext = .;
3583 @}
156e34dd 3584 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3585 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3586@}
3587@end smallexample
3588@noindent
3589In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3590zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3591the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3592defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3593upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3594
eb8476a6
MR
3595@node HIDDEN
3596@subsection HIDDEN
3597@cindex HIDDEN
3598For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3599exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3600
3601Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3602@code{HIDDEN}:
3603
3604@smallexample
3605HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3606SECTIONS
3607@{
3608 .text :
3609 @{
3610 *(.text)
3611 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3612 @}
3613 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3614 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3615@}
3616@end smallexample
3617@noindent
3618In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3619
252b5132
RH
3620@node PROVIDE
3621@subsection PROVIDE
3622@cindex PROVIDE
3623In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3624only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3625the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3626@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3627@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3628@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3629@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3630@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3631
3632Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3633@smallexample
3634SECTIONS
3635@{
3636 .text :
3637 @{
3638 *(.text)
3639 _etext = .;
3640 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3641 @}
3642@}
3643@end smallexample
3644
3645In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3646underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3647the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3648underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3649If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3650linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3651
7af8e998
L
3652@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3653@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3654@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3655Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3656hidden and won't be exported.
3657
73ae6183
NC
3658@node Source Code Reference
3659@subsection Source Code Reference
3660
3661Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3662intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3663a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3664symbol that does not have a value.
3665
3666Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3667transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3668stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3669prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3670mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3671of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3672variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3673linker script variable might be referred to as:
3674
3675@smallexample
3676 extern int foo;
3677@end smallexample
3678
3679But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3680
3681@smallexample
3682 _foo = 1000;
3683@end smallexample
3684
3685In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3686transformation has taken place.
3687
3688When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3689things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3690in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3691second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3692table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3693contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3694value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3695
3696@smallexample
3697 int foo = 1000;
3698@end smallexample
3699
10bf6894 3700creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3701holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3702number 1000 is initially stored.
3703
3704When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3705first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3706memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3707So:
3708
3709@smallexample
3710 foo = 1;
3711@end smallexample
3712
3713looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3714associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3715address. Whereas:
3716
3717@smallexample
3718 int * a = & foo;
3719@end smallexample
3720
10bf6894 3721looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3722and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3723the variable @samp{a}.
3724
3725Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3726the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3727an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3728
3729@smallexample
3730 foo = 1000;
3731@end smallexample
3732
3733creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3734the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3735address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3736linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3737access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3738
3739Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3740you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3741use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3742section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3743linker script contains these declarations:
3744
3745@smallexample
3746@group
3747 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3748 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3749 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3750@end group
3751@end smallexample
3752
3753Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3754
3755@smallexample
3756@group
3757 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3758
73ae6183
NC
3759 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3760@end group
3761@end smallexample
3762
3763Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3764
252b5132 3765@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3766@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3767@kindex SECTIONS
3768The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3769into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3770
3771The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3772@smallexample
3773SECTIONS
3774@{
3775 @var{sections-command}
3776 @var{sections-command}
3777 @dots{}
3778@}
3779@end smallexample
3780
3781Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3782
3783@itemize @bullet
3784@item
3785an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3786@item
3787a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3788@item
3789an output section description
3790@item
3791an overlay description
3792@end itemize
3793
3794The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3795@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3796those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3797understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3798the layout of the output file.
3799
3800Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3801below.
3802
3803If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3804linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3805section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3806input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3807example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3808in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3809
3810@menu
3811* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3812* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3813* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3814* Input Section:: Input section description
3815* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3816* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3817* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3818* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3819* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3820@end menu
3821
3822@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3823@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3824The full description of an output section looks like this:
3825@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3826@group
7e7d5768 3827@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 3828 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 3829 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
3830 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3831 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3832 @{
3833 @var{output-section-command}
3834 @var{output-section-command}
3835 @dots{}
abc9061b 3836 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
3837@end group
3838@end smallexample
3839
3840Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3841
3842The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3843name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
3844The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
3845the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
3846The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3847
3848Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3849
3850@itemize @bullet
3851@item
3852a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3853@item
3854an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3855@item
3856data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3857@item
3858a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3859@end itemize
3860
3861@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3862@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3863@cindex name, section
3864@cindex section name
3865The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3866meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3867support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3868must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3869example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3870output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3871names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3872quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3873characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3874commas must be quoted.
3875
3876The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3877Discarding}.
3878
3879@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3880@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3881@cindex address, section
3882@cindex section address
3883The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3884address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3885is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3886
3887If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3888section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3889to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3890alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3891contained within the output section.
3892
3893The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3894
3895@itemize @bullet
3896@item
3897If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3898is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3899in that region.
3900
3901@item
3902If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3903regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3904section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3905be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3906
3907@item
3908If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3909the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3910counter.
3911@end itemize
3912
3913@noindent
3914For example:
3915
252b5132
RH
3916@smallexample
3917.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3918@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3919
252b5132
RH
3920@noindent
3921and
ea5cae92 3922
252b5132
RH
3923@smallexample
3924.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3925@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3926
252b5132
RH
3927@noindent
3928are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3929@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3930counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3931counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3932input sections.
252b5132
RH
3933
3934The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3935For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3936so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3937do something like this:
3938@smallexample
3939.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3940@end smallexample
3941@noindent
3942This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3943aligned upward to the specified value.
3944
3945Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3946location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3947sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3948
3949@node Input Section
36f63dca 3950@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3951@cindex input sections
3952@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3953The most common output section command is an input section description.
3954
3955The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3956You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3957in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3958map the input files into your memory layout.
3959
3960@menu
3961* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3962* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3963* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3964* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3965* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3966@end menu
3967
3968@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3969@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3970@cindex input section basics
3971An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3972by a list of section names in parentheses.
3973
3974The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3975describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3976
3977The most common input section description is to include all input
3978sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3979include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3980@smallexample
3981*(.text)
3982@end smallexample
3983@noindent
18625d54
CM
3984Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3985of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3986match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3987example:
252b5132 3988@smallexample
b4346c09 3989*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3990@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3991will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3992@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3993
3994There are two ways to include more than one section:
3995@smallexample
3996*(.text .rdata)
3997*(.text) *(.rdata)
3998@end smallexample
3999@noindent
4000The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4001@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4002first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4003they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4004@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4005@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4006
4007You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4008You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4009needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4010@smallexample
4011data.o(.data)
4012@end smallexample
4013
ae17ab41
CM
4014To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4015of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4016
4017Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4018
4019@smallexample
4020@group
4021SECTIONS @{
4022 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4023 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4024@}
4025@end group
4026@end smallexample
4027
4028In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4029input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4030@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4031@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4032whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4033
967928e9
AM
4034You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4035matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4036with no whitespace around the colon.
4037
4038@table @samp
4039@item archive:file
4040matches file within archive
4041@item archive:
4042matches the whole archive
4043@item :file
4044matches file but not one in an archive
4045@end table
4046
4047Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4048wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4049single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4050@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4051within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4052also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4053other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4054from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4055command.
4056
252b5132
RH
4057If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4058the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4059commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4060@smallexample
4061data.o
4062@end smallexample
4063
967928e9
AM
4064When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4065and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4066characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4067name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4068did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4069though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4070@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4071the archive search path.
4072
4073@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4074@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4075@cindex input section wildcards
4076@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4077@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4078@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4079In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4080name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4081
4082The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4083pattern for the file name.
4084
4085The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4086
4087@table @samp
4088@item *
4089matches any number of characters
4090@item ?
4091matches any single character
4092@item [@var{chars}]
4093matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4094character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4095@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4096@item \
4097quotes the following character
4098@end table
4099
4100When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4101will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4102Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4103exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4104@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4105a @samp{/} character.
4106
4107File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4108specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4109does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4110
4111If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4112appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4113will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4114sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4115@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4116@smallexample
4117.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4118.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4119@end smallexample
4120
bcaa7b3e 4121@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4122Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4123in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4124this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4125pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4126@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4127into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4128
bcaa7b3e
L
4129@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4130@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4131difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4132descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4133Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4134reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4135
02ecc8e9
L
4136@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4137@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4138difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4139ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4140encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4141
bcaa7b3e
L
4142@cindex SORT
4143@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4144
4145When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4146can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4147
4148@enumerate
4149@item
4150@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4151It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4152sections have the same name.
4153@item
4154@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4155It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4156sections have the same alignment.
4157@item
c0065db7 4158@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4159treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4160@item
4161@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4162is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4163@item
4164All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4165@end enumerate
4166
4167When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4168section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4169takes precedence over the command line option.
4170
4171If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4172command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4173treated as nested sorting command.
4174
4175@enumerate
4176@item
4177@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4178@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4179@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4180@item
4181@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4182@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4183@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4184@end enumerate
4185
4186If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4187command line option will be ignored.
4188
eda680f8
L
4189@cindex SORT_NONE
4190@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4191section sorting option.
4192
252b5132
RH
4193If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4194@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4195precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4196
4197This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4198files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4199sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4200The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4201with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4202linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4203@smallexample
4204@group
4205SECTIONS @{
4206 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4207 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4208 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4209 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4210@}
4211@end group
4212@end smallexample
4213
4214@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4215@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4216@cindex common symbol placement
4217@cindex uninitialized data placement
4218A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4219file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4220linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4221named @samp{COMMON}.
4222
4223You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4224other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4225particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4226input files are placed in another section.
4227
4228In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4229@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4230@smallexample
4231.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4232@end smallexample
4233
4234@cindex scommon section
4235@cindex small common symbols
4236Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4237example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4238symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4239different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4240the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4241symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4242to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4243locations.
4244
4245@cindex [COMMON]
4246You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4247notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4248@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4249
4250@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4251@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4252@cindex KEEP
4253@cindex garbage collection
4254When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4255it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4256This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4257with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4258@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4259
4260@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4261@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4262The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4263to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4264start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4265@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4266follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4267@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4268@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4269All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4270files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4271
4272@smallexample
4273@group
4274SECTIONS @{
4275 outputa 0x10000 :
4276 @{
4277 all.o
4278 foo.o (.input1)
4279 @}
36f63dca
NC
4280@end group
4281@group
252b5132
RH
4282 outputb :
4283 @{
4284 foo.o (.input2)
4285 foo1.o (.input1)
4286 @}
36f63dca
NC
4287@end group
4288@group
252b5132
RH
4289 outputc :
4290 @{
4291 *(.input1)
4292 *(.input2)
4293 @}
4294@}
4295@end group
a1ab1d2a 4296@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4297
4298@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4299@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4300@cindex data
4301@cindex section data
4302@cindex output section data
4303@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4304@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4305@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4306@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4307@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4308You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4309@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4310an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4311parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4312value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4313counter.
4314
4315The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4316store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4317bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4318stored.
4319
4320For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4321of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4322@smallexample
4323BYTE(1)
4324LONG(addr)
4325@end smallexample
4326
4327When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4328same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4329target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4330@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4331@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4332
4333If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4334which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4335When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4336true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4337endianness of the first input object file.
4338
36f63dca 4339Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4340between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4341@smallexample
4342SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4343@end smallexample
4344whereas this will work:
4345@smallexample
4346SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4347@end smallexample
4348
252b5132
RH
4349@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4350@cindex holes, filling
4351@cindex unspecified memory
4352You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4353current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4354otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4355gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4356with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4357necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4358point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4359than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4360different parts of an output section.
4361
4362This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4363value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4364@smallexample
563e308f 4365FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4366@end smallexample
4367
4368The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4369section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4370part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4371entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4372precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4373expression.
252b5132
RH
4374
4375@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4376@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4377There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4378commands.
4379
4380@table @code
4381@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4382@cindex input filename symbols
4383@cindex filename symbols
4384@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4385The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4386The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4387file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4388the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4389
4390This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4391normally used for any other object file format.
4392
4393@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4394@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4395@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4396@item CONSTRUCTORS
4397When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4398unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4399destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4400arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4401automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4402For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4403linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4404@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4405ignored for other object file formats.
4406
4407The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4408constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4409Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4410the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4411first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4412of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4413compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4414formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4415@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4416the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4417destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4418@code{exit}.
4419
4420For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4421arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4422addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4423and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4424linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4425runtime code expects to see.
4426
4427@smallexample
4428 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4429 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4430 *(.ctors)
4431 LONG(0)
4432 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4433 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4434 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4435 *(.dtors)
4436 LONG(0)
4437 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4438@end smallexample
4439
4440If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4441which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4442are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4443are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4444command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4445@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4446@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4447@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4448
4449Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4450and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4451need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4452scripts.
4453
4454@end table
4455
4456@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4457@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4458@cindex discarding sections
4459@cindex sections, discarding
4460@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4461The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4462This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4463may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4464@smallexample
49c13adb 4465.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4466@end smallexample
4467@noindent
4468will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4469@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4470sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4471space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4472too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4473space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4474@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4475@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4476This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4477
a0976ea4 4478The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4479on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4480symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4481the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4482section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4483
4484@cindex /DISCARD/
4485The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4486input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4487section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4488
4489@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4490@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4491@cindex output section attributes
4492We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4493like this:
0c71d759 4494
252b5132 4495@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4496@group
7e7d5768 4497@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4498 [AT(@var{lma})]
4499 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4500 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4501 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4502 @{
4503 @var{output-section-command}
4504 @var{output-section-command}
4505 @dots{}
562d3460 4506 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4507@end group
4508@end smallexample
0c71d759 4509
252b5132
RH
4510We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4511@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4512remaining section attributes.
4513
a1ab1d2a 4514@menu
252b5132
RH
4515* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4516* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4517* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4518* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4519* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4520* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4521* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4522* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4523@end menu
4524
4525@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4526@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4527Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4528parentheses. The following types are defined:
4529
4530@table @code
4531@item NOLOAD
4532The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4533loaded into memory when the program is run.
4534@item DSECT
4535@itemx COPY
4536@itemx INFO
4537@itemx OVERLAY
4538These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4539rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4540marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4541section when the program is run.
4542@end table
4543
4544@kindex NOLOAD
4545@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4546@cindex loading, preventing
4547The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4548the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4549the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4550@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4551need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4552@smallexample
4553@group
4554SECTIONS @{
4555 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4556 @dots{}
4557@}
4558@end group
4559@end smallexample
4560
4561@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4562@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4563@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4564@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4565@cindex load address
4566@cindex section load address
4567Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4568@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4569@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4570specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4571address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4572
ea5cae92
NC
4573The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4574specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4575takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4576load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4577region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4578
4579If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4580section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4581load address:
4582
4583@itemize @bullet
4584@item
4585If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4586the LMA address as well.
4587
4588@item
4589If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4590
4591@item
4592Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4593with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4594section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4595VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4596the last section in the located region.
4597
4598@item
4599If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4600that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4601
4602@item
4603If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4604section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4605@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4606
4607@cindex ROM initialized data
4608@cindex initialized data in ROM
4609This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4610example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4611called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4612@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4613even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4614uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4615defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4616counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4617
4618@smallexample
4619@group
4620SECTIONS
4621 @{
4622 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4623 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4624 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4625 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4626 .bss 0x3000 :
4627 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4628@}
4629@end group
4630@end smallexample
4631
4632The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4633this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4634the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4635how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4636script.
4637
4638@smallexample
4639@group
4640extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4641char *src = &_etext;
4642char *dst = &_data;
4643
ea5cae92
NC
4644/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4645while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4646 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4647
ea5cae92 4648/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4649for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4650 *dst = 0;
4651@end group
4652@end smallexample
4653
bbf115d3
L
4654@node Forced Output Alignment
4655@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4656@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4657@cindex forcing output section alignment
4658@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4659You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4660alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4661intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4662
7e7d5768
AM
4663@node Forced Input Alignment
4664@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4665@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4666@cindex forcing input section alignment
4667@cindex input section alignment
4668You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4669SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4670sections, whether larger or smaller.
4671
0c71d759
NC
4672@node Output Section Constraint
4673@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4674@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4675@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4676@cindex constraints on output sections
4677You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4678of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4679read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4680@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4681
252b5132 4682@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4683@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4684@kindex >@var{region}
4685@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4686@cindex memory regions and sections
4687You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4688using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4689
4690Here is a simple example:
4691@smallexample
4692@group
4693MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4694SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4695@end group
4696@end smallexample
4697
4698@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4699@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4700@kindex :@var{phdr}
4701@cindex section, assigning to program header
4702@cindex program headers and sections
4703You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4704using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4705one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4706assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4707@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4708linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4709
4710Here is a simple example:
4711@smallexample
4712@group
4713PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4714SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4715@end group
4716@end smallexample
4717
4718@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4719@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4720@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4721@cindex section fill pattern
4722@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4723You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4724@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4725(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4726within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4727alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4728necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4729of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4730an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4731fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4732other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4733pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4734expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4735
4736You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4737output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4738
4739Here is a simple example:
4740@smallexample
4741@group
563e308f 4742SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4743@end group
4744@end smallexample
4745
4746@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4747@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4748@kindex OVERLAY
4749@cindex overlays
4750An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4751are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4752the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4753copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4754required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4755can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4756than another.
4757
4758Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4759@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4760output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4761command is as follows:
4762@smallexample
4763@group
4764OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4765 @{
4766 @var{secname1}
4767 @{
4768 @var{output-section-command}
4769 @var{output-section-command}
4770 @dots{}
4771 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4772 @var{secname2}
4773 @{
4774 @var{output-section-command}
4775 @var{output-section-command}
4776 @dots{}
4777 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4778 @dots{}
abc9061b 4779 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4780@end group
4781@end smallexample
4782
4783Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4784section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4785section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4786those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4787except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4788sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4789
abc9061b
CC
4790The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4791the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4792
252b5132
RH
4793The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4794addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4795memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4796whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4797and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4798and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4799
56dd11f0
NC
4800If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4801references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4802the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4803sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4804@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4805
4806For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4807provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4808defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4809@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4810the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4811within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4812symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4813
4814At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4815the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4816
4817Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4818@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4819@smallexample
4820@group
4821 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4822 @{
4823 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4824 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4825 @}
4826@end group
4827@end smallexample
4828@noindent
4829This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4830address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4831@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4832following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4833@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4834@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4835
4836C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4837like the following.
4838
4839@smallexample
4840@group
4841 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4842 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4843 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4844@end group
4845@end smallexample
4846
4847Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4848everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4849example could have been written identically as follows.
4850
4851@smallexample
4852@group
4853 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4854 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4855 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4856 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4857 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4858 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4859 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4860@end group
4861@end smallexample
4862
4863@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4864@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4865@kindex MEMORY
4866@cindex memory regions
4867@cindex regions of memory
4868@cindex allocating memory
4869@cindex discontinuous memory
4870The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4871memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4872
4873The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4874memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4875may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4876can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4877set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4878regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4879around to fit into the available regions.
4880
4881A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4882command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4883you wish. The syntax is:
4884@smallexample
4885@group
a1ab1d2a 4886MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4887 @{
4888 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4889 @dots{}
4890 @}
4891@end group
4892@end smallexample
4893
4894The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4895region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4896Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4897with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4898must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4899add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4900command.
252b5132
RH
4901
4902@cindex memory region attributes
4903The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4904whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4905not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4906@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4907section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4908the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4909them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4910
4911The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4912@table @samp
4913@item R
4914Read-only section
4915@item W
4916Read/write section
4917@item X
4918Executable section
4919@item A
4920Allocatable section
4921@item I
4922Initialized section
4923@item L
4924Same as @samp{I}
4925@item !
c09e9a8c 4926Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4927@end table
4928
4929If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4930@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4931attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4932in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4933attributes.
4934
4935@kindex ORIGIN =
4936@kindex o =
4937@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4938The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4939the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4940cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4941abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4942@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4943
4944@kindex LENGTH =
4945@kindex len =
4946@kindex l =
4947The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4948region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4949be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4950@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4951
4952In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4953available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4954and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4955linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4956is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4957or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4958explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4959region.
4960
4961@smallexample
4962@group
a1ab1d2a 4963MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4964 @{
4965 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4966 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4967 @}
4968@end group
4969@end smallexample
4970
4971Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4972specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4973@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4974a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4975output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4976was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4977the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4978output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4979region, the linker will issue an error message.
4980
3ec57632 4981It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4982expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4983@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4984
4985@smallexample
4986@group
c0065db7 4987 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4988@end group
4989@end smallexample
4990
252b5132
RH
4991@node PHDRS
4992@section PHDRS Command
4993@kindex PHDRS
4994@cindex program headers
4995@cindex ELF program headers
4996@cindex program segments
4997@cindex segments, ELF
4998The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4999@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5000loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5001program with the @samp{-p} option.
5002
5003When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5004reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5005program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5006This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5007interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5008
5009The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5010in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5011precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5012the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5013not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5014
5015The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5016generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5017ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5018
5019This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5020@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5021
5022@smallexample
5023@group
5024PHDRS
5025@{
5026 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5027 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5028@}
5029@end group
5030@end smallexample
5031
5032The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5033of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5034header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5035with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5036must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5037is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5038
5039Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5040system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5041specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5042sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5043attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5044Section Phdr}.
5045
5046It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5047merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5048repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5049contain the section.
5050
5051If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5052then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5053not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5054convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5055placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5056default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5057segment at all.
5058
5059@kindex FILEHDR
5060@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5061You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5062the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5063The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5064file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5065include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5066segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5067these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5068
5069The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5070value of the keyword.
5071
5072@table @asis
5073@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5074Indicates an unused program header.
5075
5076@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5077Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5078the file.
5079
5080@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5081Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5082
5083@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5084Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5085found.
5086
5087@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5088Indicates a segment holding note information.
5089
5090@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5091A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5092ABI.
5093
5094@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5095Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5096
5097@item @var{expression}
5098An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5099be used for types not defined above.
5100@end table
5101
5102You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5103in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5104@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5105Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5106output section attribute.
5107
5108The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5109which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5110explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5111an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5112header.
5113
5114Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5115headers used on a native ELF system.
5116
5117@example
5118@group
5119PHDRS
5120@{
5121 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5122 interp PT_INTERP ;
5123 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5124 data PT_LOAD ;
5125 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5126@}
5127
5128SECTIONS
5129@{
5130 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5131 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5132 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5133 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5134 @dots{}
5135 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5136 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5137 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5138 @dots{}
5139@}
5140@end group
5141@end example
5142
5143@node VERSION
5144@section VERSION Command
5145@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5146@cindex symbol versions
5147@cindex version script
5148@cindex versions of symbols
5149The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5150only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5151symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5152a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5153shared library.
5154
5155You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5156you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5157also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5158
5159The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5160@smallexample
5161VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5162@end smallexample
5163
5164The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5165Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5166version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5167version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5168version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5169scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5170library.
5171
5172The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5173examples.
5174
5175@smallexample
5176VERS_1.1 @{
5177 global:
5178 foo1;
5179 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5180 old*;
5181 original*;
5182 new*;
252b5132
RH
5183@};
5184
5185VERS_1.2 @{
5186 foo2;
5187@} VERS_1.1;
5188
5189VERS_2.0 @{
5190 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5191 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5192 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5193 "f(int, double)";
5194 @};
252b5132
RH
5195@} VERS_1.2;
5196@end smallexample
5197
5198This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5199version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5200The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5201a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5202of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5203symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5204is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5205in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5206However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5207name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5208
5209Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5210depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5211to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5212
5213Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5214depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5215and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5216
5217When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5218specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5219unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5220unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5221somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5222wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5223wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5224set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5225ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5226
5227The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5228they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5229could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5230However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5231
0f6bf451 5232Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5233in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5234symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5235won't.
5236
5237@smallexample
7c9c73be 5238@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5239@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5240
252b5132
RH
5241When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5242symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5243requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5244shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5245loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5246linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5247application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5248way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5249all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5250search for each symbol reference.
5251
5252The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5253doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5254that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5255functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5256the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5257required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5258that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5259versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5260the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5261
5262There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5263first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5264source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5265script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5266maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5267@smallexample
5268__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5269@end smallexample
5270@noindent
5271in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5272be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5273The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5274@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5275takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5276
5277The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5278function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5279an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5280version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5281linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5282
5283To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5284source file. Here is an example:
5285
5286@smallexample
5287__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5288__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5289__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5290__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5291@end smallexample
5292
5293In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5294unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5295example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5296@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5297
5298When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5299some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5300this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5301@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5302declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5303you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5304
5305If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5306within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5307(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5308specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5309
cb840a31
L
5310You can also specify the language in the version script:
5311
5312@smallexample
5313VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5314@end smallexample
5315
c0065db7 5316The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5317The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5318demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5319patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5320@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5321
86043bbb
MM
5322Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5323described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5324or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5325the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5326whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5327cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5328might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5329should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5330expect when you upgrade.
5331
252b5132
RH
5332@node Expressions
5333@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5334@cindex expressions
5335@cindex arithmetic
5336The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5337that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5338expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5339host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5340
5341You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5342
5343The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5344expressions.
5345
5346@menu
5347* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5348* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5349* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5350* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5351* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5352* Operators:: Operators
5353* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5354* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5355* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5356@end menu
5357
5358@node Constants
5359@subsection Constants
5360@cindex integer notation
5361@cindex constants in linker scripts
5362All constants are integers.
5363
5364As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5365octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5366hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5367@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5368@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5369value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5370
5371@cindex scaled integers
5372@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5373@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5374@cindex suffixes for integers
5375@cindex integer suffixes
5376In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5377constant by
5378@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5379@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5380@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5381@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5382@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5383@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5384@tex
5385${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5386@end tex
5387@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5388respectively. For example, the following
5389all refer to the same quantity:
5390
252b5132 5391@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5392_fourk_1 = 4K;
5393_fourk_2 = 4096;
5394_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5395_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5396@end smallexample
5397
8a308ae8
NC
5398Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5399conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5400
0c71d759
NC
5401@node Symbolic Constants
5402@subsection Symbolic Constants
5403@cindex symbolic constants
5404@kindex CONSTANT
5405It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5406the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5407
5408@table @code
5409@item MAXPAGESIZE
5410@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5411The target's maximum page size.
5412
5413@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5414@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5415The target's default page size.
5416@end table
5417
5418So for example:
5419
5420@smallexample
9d5777a3 5421 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5422@end smallexample
5423
5424will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5425supported by the target.
5426
252b5132
RH
5427@node Symbols
5428@subsection Symbol Names
5429@cindex symbol names
5430@cindex names
5431@cindex quoted symbol names
5432@kindex "
5433Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5434and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5435Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5436specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5437keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5438@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5439"SECTION" = 9;
5440"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5441@end smallexample
5442
5443Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5444to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5445whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5446
ecca9871
L
5447@node Orphan Sections
5448@subsection Orphan Sections
5449@cindex orphan
5450Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5451are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5452script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5453output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5454placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5455attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5456same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5457If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5458at the end of the file.
5459
5460For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5461well as section flag.
5462
41911f68 5463If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5464the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5465__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5466section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5467orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5468representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5469character.
5470
252b5132
RH
5471@node Location Counter
5472@subsection The Location Counter
5473@kindex .
5474@cindex dot
5475@cindex location counter
5476@cindex current output location
5477The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5478current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5479location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5480within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5481anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5482
5483@cindex holes
5484Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5485moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5486location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5487and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5488doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5489
5490@smallexample
5491SECTIONS
5492@{
5493 output :
5494 @{
5495 file1(.text)
5496 . = . + 1000;
5497 file2(.text)
5498 . += 1000;
5499 file3(.text)
563e308f 5500 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5501@}
5502@end smallexample
5503@noindent
5504In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5505located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5506followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5507@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5508@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5509specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5510
5c6bbab8
NC
5511@cindex dot inside sections
5512Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5513current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5514statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5515absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5516however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5517not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5518
5519@smallexample
5520SECTIONS
5521@{
5522 . = 0x100
5523 .text: @{
5524 *(.text)
5525 . = 0x200
5526 @}
5527 . = 0x500
5528 .data: @{
5529 *(.data)
5530 . += 0x600
5531 @}
5532@}
5533@end smallexample
5534
5535The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5536and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5537the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5538much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5539move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5540and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5541the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5542the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5543
b5666f2f
AM
5544@cindex dot outside sections
5545Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5546output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5547needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5548
5549@smallexample
5550SECTIONS
5551@{
5552 start_of_text = . ;
5553 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5554 end_of_text = . ;
5555
5556 start_of_data = . ;
5557 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5558 end_of_data = . ;
5559@}
5560@end smallexample
5561
5562If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5563not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5564between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5565should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5566blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5567the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5568sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5569statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5570special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5571place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5572as follows:
5573
5574@smallexample
5575SECTIONS
5576@{
5577 start_of_text = . ;
5578 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5579 end_of_text = . ;
5580
5581 start_of_data = . ;
5582 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5583 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5584 end_of_data = . ;
5585@}
5586@end smallexample
5587
5588This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5589@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5590placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5591assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5592a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5593section. So you could write:
5594
5595@smallexample
5596SECTIONS
5597@{
5598 start_of_text = . ;
5599 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5600 end_of_text = . ;
5601
5602 . = . ;
5603 start_of_data = . ;
5604 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5605 end_of_data = . ;
5606@}
5607@end smallexample
5608
5609Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5610@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5611
252b5132
RH
5612@need 2000
5613@node Operators
5614@subsection Operators
5615@cindex operators for arithmetic
5616@cindex arithmetic operators
5617@cindex precedence in expressions
5618The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5619the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5620@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5621@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5622@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5623@smallexample
5624precedence associativity Operators Notes
5625(highest)
56261 left ! - ~ (1)
56272 left * / %
56283 left + -
56294 left >> <<
56305 left == != > < <= >=
56316 left &
56327 left |
56338 left &&
56349 left ||
563510 right ? :
563611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5637(lowest)
5638@end smallexample
5639Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5640(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5641(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5642@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5643@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5644@tex
5645\vskip \baselineskip
5646%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5647\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5648\hrule
5649\halign
5650{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5651height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5652&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5653height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5654\noalign{\hrule}
5655height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5656&highest&&&&&\cr
5657% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5658&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5659&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5660&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5661&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5662&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5663&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5664&7&&left&&|&\cr
5665&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5666&9&&left&&||&\cr
5667&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5668&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5669&lowest&&&&&\cr
5670height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5671\hrule}
5672@end tex
5673@iftex
5674{
5675@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5676@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5677@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5678}
5679@end iftex
5680@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5681
5682@node Evaluation
5683@subsection Evaluation
5684@cindex lazy evaluation
5685@cindex expression evaluation order
5686The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5687an expression when absolutely necessary.
5688
5689The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5690address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5691regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5692as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5693
5694However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5695until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5696other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5697for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5698
5699The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5700assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5701allocation.
5702
5703Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5704@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5705
5706If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5707available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5708following
5709@smallexample
5710@group
5711SECTIONS
5712 @{
a1ab1d2a 5713 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5714 @{ *(.text) @}
5715 @}
5716@end group
5717@end smallexample
5718@noindent
5719will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5720address}.
5721
5722@node Expression Section
5723@subsection The Section of an Expression
5724@cindex expression sections
5725@cindex absolute expressions
5726@cindex relative expressions
5727@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5728@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5729@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5730Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5731relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5732using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5733value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5734symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5735operations.
5736
abf4be64
AM
5737Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5738section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5739address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5740@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5741functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5742One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5743(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5744differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5745versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5746section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5747Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5748absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5749given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5750everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5751
5752In the following simple example,
252b5132 5753
7542af2a
AM
5754@smallexample
5755@group
5756SECTIONS
5757 @{
5758 . = 0x100;
5759 __executable_start = 0x100;
5760 .data :
5761 @{
5762 . = 0x10;
5763 __data_start = 0x10;
5764 *(.data)
5765 @}
5766 @dots{}
5767 @}
5768@end group
5769@end smallexample
252b5132 5770
7542af2a
AM
5771both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5772address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5773@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5774section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5775
5c3049d2
AM
5776For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5777addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5778
5779@itemize @bullet
5780@item
c05f749e
AM
5781Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5782operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5783absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5784@item
7542af2a
AM
5785Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5786relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5787and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5788@item
c05f749e
AM
5789Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5790in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5791address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5792before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5793@end itemize
5794
5795The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5796
5797@itemize @bullet
5798@item
5799An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5800@item
5801The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5802@item
9bc8bb33 5803The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5804relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5805(after above conversions) is also a number.
5806@item
5807The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5808relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5809section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5810@item
5811The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5812conversions) is an absolute address.
5813@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5814
5815You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5816to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5817create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5818section @samp{.data}:
5819@smallexample
5820SECTIONS
5821 @{
5822 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5823 @}
5824@end smallexample
5825@noindent
5826If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5827@samp{.data} section.
5828
7542af2a
AM
5829Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5830particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5831
252b5132
RH
5832@node Builtin Functions
5833@subsection Builtin Functions
5834@cindex functions in expressions
5835The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5836use in linker script expressions.
5837
5838@table @code
5839@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5840@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5841@cindex expression, absolute
5842Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5843of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5844value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5845normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5846
5847@item ADDR(@var{section})
5848@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5849@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5850Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5851script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5852the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5853@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5854@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5855the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5856@smallexample
5857@group
5858SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5859 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5860 @{
252b5132
RH
5861 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5862 @dots{}
5863 @}
5864 .output :
5865 @{
5866 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5867 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5868 @}
5869@dots{} @}
5870@end group
5871@end smallexample
5872
876f4090
NS
5873@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5874@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5875@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5876@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5877@cindex round up location counter
5878@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5879@cindex round up expression
5880@cindex align expression
5881Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5882to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5883doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5884arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5885expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5886equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5887
5888Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5889next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5890variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5891input sections:
252b5132
RH
5892@smallexample
5893@group
5894SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5895 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5896 *(.data)
5897 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5898 @}
5899@dots{} @}
5900@end group
5901@end smallexample
5902@noindent
5903The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5904a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5905a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5906of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5907
5908The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5909
362c1d1a
NS
5910@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5911@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5912@cindex section alignment
5913Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5914been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5915evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5916the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5917value in that section.
5918@smallexample
5919@group
5920SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5921 .output @{
5922 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5923 @dots{}
5924 @}
5925@dots{} @}
5926@end group
5927@end smallexample
5928
252b5132
RH
5929@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5930@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5931This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5932scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5933section.
5934
2d20f7bf
JJ
5935@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5936@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5937This is equivalent to either
5938@smallexample
5939(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5940@end smallexample
5941or
5942@smallexample
5943(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5944@end smallexample
5945@noindent
5946depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5947for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5948@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5949If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5950memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5951bytes in the on-disk file.
5952
5953This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5954any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5955@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5956be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5957working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5958
5959@noindent
5960Example:
5961@smallexample
5962 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5963@end smallexample
5964
5965@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5966@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5967This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5968evaluation purposes.
5969
5970@smallexample
5971 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5972@end smallexample
5973
a4f5ad88
JJ
5974@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5975@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5976This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 5977@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5978When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5979does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5980@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5981boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5982it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
5983@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
5984padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
5985section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
5986
5987@smallexample
5988 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5989@end smallexample
5990
252b5132
RH
5991@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5992@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5993@cindex symbol defaults
5994Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5995defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5996return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5997default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5998shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5999the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6000existed, its value is preserved:
6001
6002@smallexample
6003@group
6004SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6005 .text : @{
6006 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6007 @dots{}
6008 @}
6009 @dots{}
6010@}
6011@end group
6012@end smallexample
6013
3ec57632
NC
6014@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6015@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6016Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6017
252b5132
RH
6018@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6019@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6020@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6021Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6022Section LMA}).
6023
2e53f7d6
NC
6024@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6025@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6026Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6027@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6028
252b5132
RH
6029@kindex MAX
6030@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6031Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6032
6033@kindex MIN
6034@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6035Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6036
6037@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6038@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6039@cindex unallocated address, next
6040Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6041This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6042use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6043output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6044
3ec57632
NC
6045@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6046@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6047Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6048
ba916c8a
MM
6049@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6050@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6051Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6052value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6053@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6054will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6055can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6056``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6057name.
6058
252b5132
RH
6059@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6060@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6061@cindex section size
6062Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6063been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6064evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6065@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6066@smallexample
6067@group
6068SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6069 .output @{
6070 .start = . ;
6071 @dots{}
6072 .end = . ;
6073 @}
6074 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6075 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6076@dots{} @}
6077@end group
6078@end smallexample
6079
6080@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6081@itemx sizeof_headers
6082@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6083@cindex header size
6084Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6085information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6086this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6087choose, to facilitate paging.
6088
6089@cindex not enough room for program headers
6090@cindex program headers, not enough room
6091When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6092@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6093number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6094addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6095additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6096room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6097the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6098script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6099you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6100command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6101@end table
6102
6103@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6104@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6105@cindex implicit linker scripts
6106If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6107an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6108linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6109linker will report an error.
6110
6111An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6112
6113Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6114assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6115commands.
6116
6117Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6118at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6119read. This can affect archive searching.
6120
6121@ifset GENERIC
6122@node Machine Dependent
6123@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6124
6125@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6126@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6127sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6128functionality are not listed.
6129
6130@menu
36f63dca
NC
6131@ifset H8300
6132* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6133@end ifset
6134@ifset I960
6135* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6136@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6137@ifset M68HC11
6138* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6140@ifset ARM
6141* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6142@end ifset
6143@ifset HPPA
6144* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6145@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6146@ifset M68K
6147* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6148@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6149@ifset MIPS
6150* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6151@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6152@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6153* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6154@end ifset
2469cfa2 6155@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6156* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6157@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6158@ifset NDS32
6159* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6160@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6161@ifset NIOSII
6162* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6163@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6164@ifset POWERPC
6165* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6166@end ifset
6167@ifset POWERPC64
6168* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6169@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6170@ifset SPU
6171* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6172@end ifset
74459f0e 6173@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6174* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6175@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6176@ifset WIN32
6177* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6178@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6179@ifset XTENSA
6180* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6181@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6182@end menu
6183@end ifset
6184
252b5132
RH
6185@ifset H8300
6186@ifclear GENERIC
6187@raisesections
6188@end ifclear
6189
6190@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6191@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6192
6193@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6194For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6195you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6196
6197@table @emph
6198@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6199@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6200@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6201targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6202program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6203respectively.
6204
6205@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6206@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6207@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6208@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6209sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6210page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6211(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6212@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6213top page of memory).
1502569c 6214
81f5558e
NC
6215@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6216indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6217displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6218the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6219@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6220whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6221range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6222
1502569c 6223@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6224@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6225biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6226which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6227page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6228(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6229@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6230the top page of memory).
6231
6232@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6233@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
623432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6235changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6236(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6237@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6238the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6239@end table
6240
6241@ifclear GENERIC
6242@lowersections
6243@end ifclear
6244@end ifset
6245
36f63dca 6246@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6247@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6248@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6249@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6250@node Renesas
6251@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6252
c2dcd04e
NC
6253@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6254H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6255options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6256@end ifset
6257@end ifclear
6258
6259@ifset I960
6260@ifclear GENERIC
6261@raisesections
6262@end ifclear
6263
6264@node i960
6265@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6266
6267@cindex i960 support
6268
6269You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6270specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6271family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6272incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6273linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6274libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6275search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6276
6277For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6278well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6279paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6280the names
6281
6282@smallexample
6283@group
6284try
6285libtry.a
6286tryca
6287libtryca.a
6288@end group
6289@end smallexample
6290
6291@noindent
6292The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6293two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6294
6295You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6296the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6297use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6298specifies a library.
6299
6300@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6301@cindex relaxing on i960
6302@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6303you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6304@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6305them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6306instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6307instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6308target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6309not itself call any subroutines).
6310
6311@ifclear GENERIC
6312@lowersections
6313@end ifclear
6314@end ifset
6315
6316@ifset ARM
6317@ifclear GENERIC
6318@raisesections
6319@end ifclear
6320
93fd0973
SC
6321@ifset M68HC11
6322@ifclear GENERIC
6323@raisesections
6324@end ifclear
6325
6326@node M68HC11/68HC12
6327@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6328
6329@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6330
6331@subsection Linker Relaxation
6332
6333For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6334optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6335
6336@table @emph
6337@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6338@item relaxing address modes
6339@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6340targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6341program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6342respectively.
6343
6344@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6345transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6346page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6347
6348@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6349When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6350of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6351addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6352@code{bset} instructions.
6353
6354@end table
6355
6356@subsection Trampoline Generation
6357
6358@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6359@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6360For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6361call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6362will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6363trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6364case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6365point to the function trampoline.
6366
6367@ifclear GENERIC
6368@lowersections
6369@end ifclear
6370@end ifset
6371
36f63dca 6372@node ARM
3674e28a 6373@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6374
6375@cindex ARM interworking support
6376@kindex --support-old-code
6377For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6378between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6379been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6380line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6381libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6382option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6383given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6384which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6385the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6386non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6387
6388@cindex thumb entry point
6389@cindex entry point, thumb
6390@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6391The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6392@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6393But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6394branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6395executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6396
ce11ba6c
KT
6397@cindex PE import table prefixing
6398@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6399The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6400the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6401element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6402import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6403
e489d0ae
PB
6404@cindex BE8
6405@kindex --be8
6406The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6407executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6408The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6409
3674e28a
PB
6410@cindex TARGET1
6411@kindex --target1-rel
6412@kindex --target1-abs
6413The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6414@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6415or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6416and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6417
6418@cindex TARGET2
6419@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6420The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6421@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6422meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6423@table @samp
6424@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6425@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6426@item abs
6427@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6428@item got-rel
6429@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6430@end table
6431
319850b4
JB
6432@cindex FIX_V4BX
6433@kindex --fix-v4bx
6434The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6435specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6436interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6437also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6438
6439In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6440linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6441@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6442
6443In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6444relocations are ignored.
6445
845b51d6
PB
6446@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6447@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6448Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6449relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6450
6451@smallexample
6452TST rM, #1
6453MOVEQ PC, rM
6454BX Rn
6455@end smallexample
6456
6457This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6458and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6459condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6460
33bfe774
JB
6461@cindex USE_BLX
6462@kindex --use-blx
6463The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6464BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6465situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6466code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6467each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6468
6469This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6470specify it if you are using that target.
6471
c6dd86c6
JB
6472@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6473@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6474The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6475bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6476instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6477to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6478the support code can read the intended values.
6479
6480The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6481intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6482and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6483intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6484full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6485you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6486
6487If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6488enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6489@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6490mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6491vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6492@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6493
6494If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6495potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6496such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6497first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6498instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6499the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6500are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6501
2de70689
MGD
6502@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6503@kindex --fix-arm1176
6504@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6505The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6506in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6507are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6508unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6509
9d5777a3 6510Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6511Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6512http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6513
bf21ed78
MS
6514@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6515@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6516The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6517warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6518enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6519linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6520using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6521not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6522
6523@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6524@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6525The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6526warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6527@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6528linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6529using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6530
726150b7
NC
6531@cindex PIC_VENEER
6532@kindex --pic-veneer
6533The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6534ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6535is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6536@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6537
6538@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6539@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6540The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6541code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6542perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6543placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6544controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6545The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6546duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6547group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6548code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6549where they should be placed.
6550
6551The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6552@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6553placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6554branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6555placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6556value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6557exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6558A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6559linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6560from the input sections.
6561
6562The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6563@samp{N = +1}.
6564
1a51c1a4
NC
6565Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6566only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6567otherwise.
6568
1db37fe6
YG
6569@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6570@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6571@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6572The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6573
6574The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6575
68fcca92
JW
6576@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6577@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6578@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6579The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6580
6581Please contact ARM for further details.
6582
1db37fe6
YG
6583@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6584@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6585@cindex Merging exidx entries
6586The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6587
6588@kindex --long-plt
6589@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6590The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6591which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6592entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6593
36f63dca
NC
6594@ifclear GENERIC
6595@lowersections
6596@end ifclear
6597@end ifset
6598
6599@ifset HPPA
6600@ifclear GENERIC
6601@raisesections
6602@end ifclear
6603
6604@node HPPA ELF32
6605@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6606@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6607@kindex --multi-subspace
6608When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6609import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6610The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6611stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6612multiple sub-spaces.
6613
6614@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6615@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6616Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6617stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6618@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6619sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6620a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6621the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6622conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6623prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6624A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6625branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6626@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6627@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6628detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6629positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6630
6631Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6632single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6633create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6634large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6635
6636@ifclear GENERIC
6637@lowersections
6638@end ifclear
6639@end ifset
6640
7fb9f789
NC
6641@ifset M68K
6642@ifclear GENERIC
6643@raisesections
6644@end ifclear
6645
6646@node M68K
6647@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6648
6649@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6650@kindex --got=@var{type}
6651The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6652The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6653@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6654the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6655@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6656entries only at non-negative offsets.
6657@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6658entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6659support such GOTs.
6660@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6661output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6662file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6663files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6664
6665@ifclear GENERIC
6666@lowersections
6667@end ifclear
6668@end ifset
6669
833794fc
MR
6670@ifset MIPS
6671@ifclear GENERIC
6672@raisesections
6673@end ifclear
6674
6675@node MIPS
6676@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6677
6678@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6679@kindex --insn32
6680@kindex --no-insn32
6681The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6682microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6683in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6684used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6685or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6686including 16-bit ones where possible.
6687
6688@ifclear GENERIC
6689@lowersections
6690@end ifclear
6691@end ifset
6692
36f63dca
NC
6693@ifset MMIX
6694@ifclear GENERIC
6695@raisesections
6696@end ifclear
6697
6698@node MMIX
6699@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6700For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6701@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6702understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6703can translate between the two formats.
6704
6705There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6706Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6707registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6708equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6709@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6710global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6711this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6712symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6713
7a2de473
HPN
6714Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6715@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6716The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6717of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6718
6719Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6720are left out from an mmo file.
6721
6722@ifclear GENERIC
6723@lowersections
6724@end ifclear
6725@end ifset
6726
6727@ifset MSP430
6728@ifclear GENERIC
6729@raisesections
6730@end ifclear
6731
6732@node MSP430
6733@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6734For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6735will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6736just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6737
6738@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6739The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6740
6741@table @code
6742@item @samp{.vectors}
6743Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6744
6745@item @samp{.bootloader}
6746Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6747in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6748
6749@item @samp{.infomem}
6750Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6751this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6752
c0065db7 6753@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6754This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6755in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6756
6757@item @samp{.noinit}
6758Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6759
c0065db7 6760The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6761@end table
6762
6763@ifclear GENERIC
6764@lowersections
6765@end ifclear
6766@end ifset
6767
35c08157
KLC
6768@ifset NDS32
6769@ifclear GENERIC
6770@raisesections
6771@end ifclear
6772
6773@node NDS32
6774@section @code{ld} and NDS32
6775@kindex relaxing on NDS32
6776For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6777relaxes objects according to these options.
6778
6779@table @code
6780@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6781Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6782
6783@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6784Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6785
6786@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6787Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
6788
6789@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
6790Export the EX9 table after linking.
6791
6792@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
6793Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
6794
6795@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
6796Update the existing EX9 table.
6797
6798@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
6799Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
6800
6801@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
6802Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
6803
6804@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
6805Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
6806
6807@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
6808Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
6809@end table
6810
6811@ifclear GENERIC
6812@lowersections
6813@end ifclear
6814@end ifset
6815
78058a5e
SL
6816@ifset NIOSII
6817@ifclear GENERIC
6818@raisesections
6819@end ifclear
6820
6821@node Nios II
6822@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6823@cindex Nios II call relaxation
6824@kindex --relax on Nios II
6825
6826Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
6827transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
6828which may result in @command{ld} giving
6829@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6830The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
6831trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
6832outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
6833trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
6834be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
6835larger than 256MB.
6836
6837The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
6838is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
6839@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
6840locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
6841source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
6842register as a temporary.
6843
6844Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
6845relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
6846option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
6847
6848@ifclear GENERIC
6849@lowersections
6850@end ifclear
6851@end ifset
6852
2a60a7a8
AM
6853@ifset POWERPC
6854@ifclear GENERIC
6855@raisesections
6856@end ifclear
6857
6858@node PowerPC ELF32
6859@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6860@cindex PowerPC long branches
6861@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6862Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6863displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6864@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6865@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6866the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6867section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6868section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6869@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6870both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6871considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6872
6873@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6874@table @option
6875@cindex PowerPC PLT
6876@kindex --bss-plt
6877@item --bss-plt
6878Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6879generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6880the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6881writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6882@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6883PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6884compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6885BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6886
016687f8
AM
6887@kindex --secure-plt
6888@item --secure-plt
6889@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6890@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6891when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6892layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6893style BSS PLT.
6894
2a60a7a8
AM
6895@cindex PowerPC GOT
6896@kindex --sdata-got
6897@item --sdata-got
6898The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6899sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6900@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6901section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6902@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6903@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6904@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6905@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6906PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6907pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6908GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6909really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6910
6911@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6912@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6913@item --emit-stub-syms
6914This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6915symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6916
6917@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6918@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6919@item --no-tls-optimize
6920PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6921sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6922disable the optimization.
6923@end table
6924
6925@ifclear GENERIC
6926@lowersections
6927@end ifclear
6928@end ifset
6929
6930@ifset POWERPC64
6931@ifclear GENERIC
6932@raisesections
6933@end ifclear
6934
6935@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6936@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6937
6938@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6939@table @option
6940@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6941@kindex --stub-group-size
6942@item --stub-group-size
6943Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6944by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6945@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6946sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6947a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6948the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6949conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6950prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6951A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6952branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6953@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6954@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6955detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6956positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6957
6958Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6959single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6960create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6961large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6962
6963@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6964@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6965@item --emit-stub-syms
6966This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6967symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6968
6969@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6970@kindex --dotsyms
6971@kindex --no-dotsyms
6972@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6973These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6974in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6975function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6976code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6977properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6978to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6979@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6980dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6981feature.
6982
6983@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6984@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6985@item --no-tls-optimize
6986PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6987sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6988disable the optimization.
6989
6990@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6991@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6992@item --no-opd-optimize
6993PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6994corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6995the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6996Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6997
6998@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6999@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7000@item --non-overlapping-opd
7001Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7002@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7003the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7004entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7005
7006@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7007@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7008@item --no-toc-optimize
7009PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7010entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7011reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7012marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7013marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7014relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7015unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7016reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7017discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7018reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7019code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7020optimization.
7021
7022@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7023@kindex --no-multi-toc
7024@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7025If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7026@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7027where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7028entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7029total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7030grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7031TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7032calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7033help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
703464K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7035Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7036
7037@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7038@kindex --no-toc-sort
7039@item --no-toc-sort
7040By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7041happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7042placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7043with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7044referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7045@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7046results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7047off this feature.
7048
7049@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7050@kindex --plt-align
7051@kindex --no-plt-align
7052@item --plt-align
7053@itemx --no-plt-align
7054Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7055padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7056specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7057that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7058stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7059
7060@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7061@kindex --plt-static-chain
7062@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7063@item --plt-static-chain
7064@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7065Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7066chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7067chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7068
7069@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7070@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7071@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7072@item --plt-thread-safe
7073@itemx --no-thread-safe
7074With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7075lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7076another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7077order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7078memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7079barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7080looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7081seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7082default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7083@end table
7084
7085@ifclear GENERIC
7086@lowersections
7087@end ifclear
7088@end ifset
7089
49fa1e15
AM
7090@ifset SPU
7091@ifclear GENERIC
7092@raisesections
7093@end ifclear
7094
7095@node SPU ELF
7096@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7097
7098@cindex SPU ELF options
7099@table @option
7100
7101@cindex SPU plugins
7102@kindex --plugin
7103@item --plugin
7104This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7105
7106@cindex SPU overlays
7107@kindex --no-overlays
7108@item --no-overlays
7109Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7110regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7111@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7112turns off all this special overlay handling.
7113
7114@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7115@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7116@item --emit-stub-syms
7117This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7118symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7119
7120@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7121@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7122@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7123This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7124function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7125on calls to non-overlay regions.
7126
7127@cindex SPU local store size
7128@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7129@item --local-store=lo:hi
7130@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7131the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7132range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7133
c0065db7 7134@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7135@kindex --stack-analysis
7136@item --stack-analysis
7137SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7138unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7139under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7140@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7141@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7142determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7143for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7144for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7145for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7146find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7147and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7148under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7149dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7150is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7151and calls will be given.
7152
c0065db7 7153@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7154@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7155@item --emit-stack-syms
7156This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7157in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7158These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7159functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7160functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7161such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7162The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7163@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7164@end table
7165
7166@ifclear GENERIC
7167@lowersections
7168@end ifclear
7169@end ifset
7170
36f63dca
NC
7171@ifset TICOFF
7172@ifclear GENERIC
7173@raisesections
7174@end ifclear
7175
7176@node TI COFF
7177@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7178@cindex TI COFF versions
7179@kindex --format=@var{version}
7180The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7181TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7182also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7183format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7184header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7185
7186@ifclear GENERIC
7187@lowersections
7188@end ifclear
7189@end ifset
7190
2ca22b03
NC
7191@ifset WIN32
7192@ifclear GENERIC
7193@raisesections
7194@end ifclear
7195
7196@node WIN32
7197@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7198
c0065db7 7199This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7200See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7201command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7202
7203@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7204@cindex import libraries
7205@item import libraries
69da35b5 7206The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7207libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7208regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7209archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7210support for creating such libraries provided with the
7211@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7212
c0065db7
RM
7213@item exporting DLL symbols
7214@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7215The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7216
7217@table @emph
7218@item using auto-export functionality
7219@cindex using auto-export functionality
7220By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7221which is controlled by the following command line options:
7222
0a5d968e
NC
7223@itemize
7224@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7225@item --exclude-symbols
7226@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7227@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7228@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7229@end itemize
7230
09e2aba4
DK
7231When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7232(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7233symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7234often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7235private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7236options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7237exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7238final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7239
7240If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7241command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7242if either of the following are true:
7243
7244@itemize
7245@item A DEF file is used.
7246@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7247@end itemize
dc8465bf 7248
c0065db7
RM
7249@item using a DEF file
7250@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7251Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7252an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7253exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7254name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7255command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7256
7257@example
7258gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7259@end example
7260
0a5d968e
NC
7261Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7262@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7263
dc8465bf
NC
7264Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7265
7266@example
4b5bd4e7 7267LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7268
7269EXPORTS
7270foo
7271bar
7272_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7273another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7274var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7275doo = foo == foo2
7276eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7277@end example
dc8465bf 7278
7fcab871 7279This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7280symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7281alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7282by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7283@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7284@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7285export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7286in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7287symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7288
6b31ad16
DS
7289The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7290name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7291the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7292
b45619c0
NC
7293When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7294library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7295@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7296executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7297
7298With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7299specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7300non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7301
7302If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7303or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7304filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7305
4b5bd4e7
DS
7306The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7307
7308@example
7309EXPORTS
7310 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7311 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7312 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7313@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7314
7315Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7316@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7317@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7318@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7319Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7320@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7321string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7322
7323The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7324
7325@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7326will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7327by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7328linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7329library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7330
7331@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7332The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7333the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7334@code{*_imp__foo}).
7335
7336@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7337well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7338read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7339variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7340the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7341extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7342application will behave unexpectedly.
7343
7344@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7345it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7346symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7347API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7348the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7349
4b5bd4e7
DS
7350See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7351other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7352
7353@cindex creating a DEF file
7354While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7355with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7356
7357@item Using decorations
7358@cindex Using decorations
7359Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7360itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7361declared as:
7362
7363@example
7364__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7365__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7366@end example
7367
7368All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7369any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7370this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7371the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7372
7373Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7374decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7375instead:
7376
7377@example
7378__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7379__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7380@end example
7381
c0065db7
RM
7382This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7383when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7384variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7385code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7386of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7387omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7388@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7389information.
c0065db7 7390@end table
dc8465bf 7391
2ca22b03
NC
7392@cindex automatic data imports
7393@item automatic data imports
7394The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7395by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7396compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7397issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7398code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7399c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7400initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7401decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7402platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7403command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7404The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7405suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7406trigger the feature's use.
7407
c0065db7 7408auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7409additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7410
c0065db7 7411"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7412documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7413
c0065db7
RM
7414The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7415occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7416One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7417below.
7418
7419@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7420For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7421object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7422offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7423field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7424in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7425without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7426The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7427references.
7428
c0065db7
RM
7429The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7430be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7431themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7432runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7433compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7434support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7435run without error on an older system.
7436
c0065db7
RM
7437@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7438enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7439
7440@cindex direct linking to a dll
7441@item direct linking to a dll
7442The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7443including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7444libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7445traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7446libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7447function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7448though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7449storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7450tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7451large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7452
c0065db7 7453Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7454@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7455of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7456perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7457select the dll instead of an import library.
7458
2ca22b03 7459
69da35b5
NC
7460For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7461to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7462
7463@example
45e948fe
NC
7464libxxx.dll.a
7465xxx.dll.a
7466libxxx.a
7467xxx.lib
69da35b5 7468cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7469libxxx.dll
7470xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7471@end example
7472
69da35b5
NC
7473before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7474
c0065db7
RM
7475(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7476where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7477@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7478file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7479@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7480
c0065db7
RM
7481Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7482@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7483was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7484various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7485could coexist on the same machine.
7486
2ca22b03
NC
7487The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7488applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7489libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7490
7491@example
7492bin/
7493 cygxxx.dll
7494lib/
7495 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7496 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7497@end example
7498
c0065db7
RM
7499Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7500done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7501
75021. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7503@example
7504gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7505@end example
2ca22b03 7506
69da35b5
NC
7507However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7508(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7509@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7510not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7511
2ca22b03
NC
75122. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7513directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7514should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7515making the app/dll.
7516
7517@example
7518ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7519@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7520
7521Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7522
7523@example
7524gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7525@end example
69da35b5
NC
7526
7527This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7528perfectly legal
7529
7530@example
7531bin/
7532 cygxxx-5.dll
7533lib/
c0065db7 7534 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7535@end example
7536
dc8465bf 7537Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7538even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7539@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7540
7541Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7542wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7543
75441. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7545work with auto-imported data.
7546
dc8465bf
NC
75472. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7548import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7549symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7550for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7551possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7552
45e948fe
NC
75533. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7554critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7555in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7556stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7557
69da35b5 7558So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7559true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7560a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7561binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7562massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7563requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7564will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7565
c0065db7 7566@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7567@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7568@item adding additional names
7569Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7570A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7571exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7572when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7573import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7574
c0065db7 7575@example
dc8465bf
NC
7576LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7577
7578EXPORTS
c0065db7 7579foo
dc8465bf 7580_foo = foo
c0065db7 7581@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7582
7583The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7584
7585Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7586source code using the "weak" attribute:
7587
c0065db7
RM
7588@example
7589void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7590void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7591@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7592
7593See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7594symbols.
7595
7596@item renaming symbols
7597Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7598kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7599@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7600DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7601created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7602
c0065db7 7603@example
dc8465bf
NC
7604LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7605
7606EXPORTS
7607_foo = foo
c0065db7 7608@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7609
7610The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7611@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7612@end table
dc8465bf 7613
0a5d968e 7614Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7615unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7616If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7617@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7618that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7619@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7620renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7621to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7622the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7623In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7624which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7625
7626@cindex weak externals
7627@item weak externals
7628The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7629weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7630defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7631are three variants of weak externals:
7632@itemize
7633@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7634called lazy externals.
7635@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7636This form is not presently implemented.
7637@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7638implemented.
7639@end itemize
7640As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7641are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7642uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7643
7644@cindex aligned common symbols
7645@item aligned common symbols
7646As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7647desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7648the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7649carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7650by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7651tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7652but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7653warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7654
2ca22b03
NC
7655@end table
7656
7657@ifclear GENERIC
7658@lowersections
7659@end ifclear
7660@end ifset
7661
e0001a05
NC
7662@ifset XTENSA
7663@ifclear GENERIC
7664@raisesections
7665@end ifclear
7666
7667@node Xtensa
7668@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7669
7670@cindex Xtensa processors
7671The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7672@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7673specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7674keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7675example, with the command:
7676
7677@smallexample
7678SECTIONS
7679@{
7680 .text : @{
7681 *(.literal .text)
7682 @}
7683@}
7684@end smallexample
7685
7686@noindent
7687@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7688and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7689literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7690interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7691group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7692files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7693and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7694
43cd72b9 7695@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7696@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7697Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7698provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7699is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7700literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7701will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7702location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7703the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7704unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7705@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7706range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7707
7708For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7709to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7710instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7711instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7712instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7713@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7714hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7715By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7716switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7717density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7718instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7719performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7720linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7721a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7722
7723The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7724control the linker:
7725
7726@cindex Xtensa options
7727@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7728@item --size-opt
7729When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7730more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7731no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7732alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7733preserve the correctness of the code.
7734@end table
e0001a05
NC
7735
7736@ifclear GENERIC
7737@lowersections
7738@end ifclear
7739@end ifset
7740
252b5132
RH
7741@ifclear SingleFormat
7742@node BFD
7743@chapter BFD
7744
7745@cindex back end
7746@cindex object file management
7747@cindex object formats available
7748@kindex objdump -i
7749The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7750These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7751object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7752format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7753it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7754associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7755object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7756(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7757list all the formats available for your configuration.
7758
7759@cindex BFD requirements
7760@cindex requirements for BFD
7761As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7762several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7763BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7764formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7765been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7766BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7767may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7768
7769One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7770mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7771useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7772conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7773
7774@menu
7775* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7776@end menu
7777
7778@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7779@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7780@cindex opening object files
7781@include bfdsumm.texi
7782@end ifclear
7783
7784@node Reporting Bugs
7785@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7786@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7787@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7788
ff5dcc92 7789Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7790
7791Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7792it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7793to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7794work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7795@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7796
7797In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7798information that enables us to fix the bug.
7799
7800@menu
7801* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7802* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7803@end menu
7804
7805@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7806@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7807@cindex bug criteria
7808
7809If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7810
7811@itemize @bullet
7812@cindex fatal signal
7813@cindex linker crash
7814@cindex crash of linker
7815@item
7816If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7817@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7818
7819@cindex error on valid input
7820@item
ff5dcc92 7821If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7822
7823@cindex invalid input
7824@item
ff5dcc92 7825If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7826may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7827object files are correct.
7828
7829@item
7830If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7831improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7832@end itemize
7833
7834@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7835@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7836@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7837@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7838
7839A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7840products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7841recommend you contact that organization first.
7842
7843You can find contact information for many support companies and
7844individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7845distribution.
7846
ad22bfe8 7847@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7848Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7849@value{BUGURL}.
7850@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7851
7852The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7853@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7854fact or leave it out, state it!
7855
7856Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7857problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7858assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7859matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7860the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7861location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7862were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7863into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7864specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7865and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7866
7867Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7868the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7869on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7870
7871Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7872bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7873respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7874You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7875
7876To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7877
7878@itemize @bullet
7879@item
ff5dcc92 7880The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7881the @samp{--version} argument.
7882
7883Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7884the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7885
7886@item
ff5dcc92 7887Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7888patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7889
7890@item
7891The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7892version number.
7893
7894@item
ff5dcc92 7895What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7896``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7897
7898@item
7899The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7900observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7901list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7902sufficient.
7903
7904If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7905and then we might not encounter the bug.
7906
7907@item
7908A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7909bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7910provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7911bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7912state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7913requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7914we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7915attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7916
7917If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7918@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7919object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7920@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7921how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7922
7923@item
7924A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7925incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7926
ff5dcc92 7927Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7928will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7929not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7930a chance to make a mistake.
7931
7932Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7933say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7934copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7935C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7936and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7937fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7938you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7939any conclusion from our observations.
7940
7941@item
ff5dcc92 7942If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7943diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7944@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7945If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7946context, not by line number.
7947
7948The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7949sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7950@end itemize
7951
7952Here are some things that are not necessary:
7953
7954@itemize @bullet
7955@item
7956A description of the envelope of the bug.
7957
7958Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7959which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7960changes will not affect it.
7961
7962This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7963will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7964with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7965We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7966
7967Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7968of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7969output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7970less time, and so on.
7971
7972However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7973report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7974
7975@item
7976A patch for the bug.
7977
7978A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7979the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7980a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7981to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7982
ff5dcc92 7983Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7984construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7985through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7986able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7987fixed.
7988
7989And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7990patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7991help us to understand.
7992
7993@item
7994A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7995
7996Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7997things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7998@end itemize
7999
8000@node MRI
8001@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8002@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8003To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8004linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8005alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8006described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8007simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8008@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8009linker commands; these commands are described here.
8010
8011In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8012file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8013features to make use of them.
8014
8015You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8016@samp{-c} command-line option.
8017
8018Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8019command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8020blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8021MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8022issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8023
8024Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8025
8026You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8027lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8028The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8029
8030@table @code
8031@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8032@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8033@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8034Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8035the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8036@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8037your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8038script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8039commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8040input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8041@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8042
8043@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8044@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8045Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8046in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8047
8048@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8049
8050@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8051@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8052Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8053@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8054
8055@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8056@item BASE @var{expression}
8057Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8058absolute addresses) in the output file.
8059
8060@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8061@item CHIP @var{expression}
8062@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8063This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8064
8065@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8066@item END
8067This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8068
8069@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8070@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8071Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8072language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8073
8074@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8075@item
252b5132
RH
8076S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8077
8078@item
8079IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8080
8081@item
8082COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8083@samp{COFF}
8084@end enumerate
8085
8086@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8087@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8088Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8089@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8090
8091The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8092same line, with no change in its effect.
8093
8094@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8095@item LOAD @var{filename}
8096@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8097Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8098same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8099command line.
8100
8101@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8102@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8103@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8104MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8105option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8106
8107@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8108@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8109@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8110Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8111order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8112script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8113sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8114file, in the order specified.
8115
8116@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8117@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8118@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8119@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8120Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8121@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8122
8123@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8124@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8125@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8126@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8127You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8128specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8129If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8130@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8131@end table
8132
793c5807
NC
8133@node GNU Free Documentation License
8134@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8135@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8136
370b66a1
CD
8137@node LD Index
8138@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8139
8140@printindex cp
8141
8142@tex
7ca01ed9 8143% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8144% meantime:
8145\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8146\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8147\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8148\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8149\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8150\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8151\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8152\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8153\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8154% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8155@end tex
8156
252b5132 8157@bye
This page took 1.192735 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.